Yealink SIP-T2 Series Administrator's Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Yealink Manuals
  4. IP Phone
  5. SIP-T2 Series
  6. Administrator's manual

Yealink SIP-T2 Series Administrator's Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for SIP-T2 Series:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Table Of Contents
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Administrator's Manual
63

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the SIP-T2 Series and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Yealink SIP-T2 Series

Summary of Contents for Yealink SIP-T2 Series

  • Page 2 Yealink and/or its respective suppliers are not responsible for the suitability of the information contained in this document for any reason. The information is provided “as is”, and Yealink does not provide any warranty and is subject to change without notice. All risks other than risks caused by use of the...

  • Page 3: End User License Agreement

    The EULA for this product is available on the Yealink Support page for the product.

  • Page 4: Gnu Gpl Information

    GPL. Please refer to the GPL for the exact terms and conditions of the license. The original GPL license, source code of components licensed under GPL and used in Yealink products can be downloaded from Yealink web site: http://www.yealink.com/GPLOpenSource.aspx?BaseInfoCateId=293&NewsCateId=293&CateId=293.

  • Page 5: Introduction

    Introduction About This Guide Yealink administrator guide is intended for administrators who need to properly configure, customize, manage, and troubleshoot the IP phone system rather than end-users. This guide helps you understand the Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) components, and provides descriptions of all available phone features.
  • Page 6 The purpose of is to serve as a basic guidance for provisioning Yealink IP phones with a provisioning server. If you are new to this process, it is helpful to read this guide. Description of Configuration Parameters in CFG Files, which describes all configuration ...

  • Page 7: Conventions Used In Yealink Documentations

    Introduction Conventions Used in Yealink Documentations Yealink documentations contain a few typographic conventions and writing conventions. You need to know the following basic typographic conventions to distinguish types of in-text information: Convention Description Highlights the web/phone user interface items such as menus,...

  • Page 8: Summary Table Format

    The central provisioning method requires you to configure parameters located in CFG format configuration files that Yealink provides. For more information on configuration files, refer to Configuration Files on page 101. As shown below, the table specifies the configuration file name and the corresponding parameters.

  • Page 9: Configuration Parameter Table Format

    Introduction Configuration Parameter Table Format The following configuration parameter table describes the parameter that you can configure to make the feature (for example, auto answer) work. Sometimes you will see the words “Refer to the following content” in the Permitted Values or Note Default field.
  • Page 10 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones and locate the specific parameter in the CFG file. For example, if you want to enable the auto answer feature for account 1, you need to locate the account.1.auto_answer in the MAC.cfg file and then configure it as required (for example, account.1.auto_answer = 1).

  • Page 11: Recommended References

    For more information on configuring and administering other Yealink products not included in this guide, refer to product support page at Yealink Technical Support. To access the latest Release Notes or other guides for Yealink IP phones, refer to the Document Download page for your phone at Yealink Technical Support.

  • Page 12: Understanding Voip Principle And Sip Components

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones If you want to find Request for Comments (RFC) documents, type http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfcNNNN.txt (NNNN is the RFC number) into the location field of your browser. This guide mainly takes the SIP-T46G IP phones as example for reference. For more details on...

  • Page 13: Sip Components

    Introduction SIP provides capabilities to: Determine the location of the target endpoint -- SIP supports address resolution, name  mapping, and call redirection. Determine media capabilities of the target endpoint -- Via Session Description Protocol  (SDP), SIP determines the “lowest level” of common services between endpoints. Conferences are established using only media capabilities that can be supported by all endpoints.
  • Page 14 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones firewalls like to know what applications are flowing through which ports and it is possible to use content types of other applications other than the one you are trying to let through what has been denied.

  • Page 15: Table Of Contents

    SIP IP Phone Models ................................. 1 Expansion Modules ................................... 1 Getting Started ................3 What IP Phones Need to Meet ............................. 3 Yealink IP Phones in a Network ............................3 Initialization Process Overview ............................. 4 Verifying Startup ..................................6 Setting Up Your System ..............7 Setting Up Your Phone Network ............................
  • Page 16 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones IPv6 Support ..................................52 VPN ...................................... 61 Network Address Translation (NAT) ........................64 Quality of Service (QoS) .............................. 81 802.1X Authentication ..............................84 Setting Up Your Phones with a Provisioning Server ....................95 Provisioning Points to Consider ..........................

  • Page 17: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Specifying the Default Input Method........................246 Logo Customization ................................247 Customizing a Logo Template File ........................248 Configuring the Logo Shown on the Idle Screen ................... 249 Softkey Layout ..................................252 Customizing Softkey Layout Template File ....................... 253 Key As Send .....................................
  • Page 18 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones SIP Session Timer .................................. 386 Session Timer ..................................388 Ignoring Incoming Calls ..............................391 Call Hold ....................................392 Music on Hold (MoH) ..............................397 Call Forward ..................................... 400 Call Transfer ..................................... 423 Conference ....................................
  • Page 19 Table of Contents Configuring Advanced Features ..........511 Remote Phone Book ................................512 Customizing Remote Phone Book Template File ................... 512 Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) ......................519 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ................................532 BLF Subscription ................................533 Visual Alert and Audio Alert for BLF Pickup ..................... 537 BLF LED Mode ................................
  • Page 20 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Example Macros ................................710 Configuring Audio Features ............713 Redial Tone ....................................713 Ring Tones ....................................714 Distinctive Ring Tones ................................. 719 Tones ......................................726 Voice Mail Tone ..................................734 Ringer Device for Headset ..............................
  • Page 21 Table of Contents Incoming Signaling Validation ............................825 Troubleshooting ................. 829 Troubleshooting Methods ..............................829 Viewing Log Files ................................. 829 Capturing Packets ................................ 843 Enabling Watch Dog Feature ..........................846 Getting Information from Status Indicators ..................... 847 Analyzing Configuration Files ..........................847 Exporting All the Diagnostic Files .........................
  • Page 22 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Appendix I: SIP Call Flows ..............................920 Successful Call Setup and Disconnect ........................ 921 Unsuccessful Call Setup—Called User is Busy ....................923 Unsuccessful Call Setup—Called User Does Not Answer ................925 Successful Call Setup and Call Hold ........................

  • Page 23: Product Overview

    This section introduces EXP20, EXP40 and EXP50 expansion modules. The expansion modules are consoles you can connect to Yealink IP phones to add DSS keys, which can be used to assign predefined functionalities for quickly accessing features. If you want to configure the expansion module keys, you have to connect the expansion module(s) to the IP phone in advance.
  • Page 24 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones the functional capability of your IP phone. For more information on how to connect and use the Yealink EXP-specific user guide expansion module, refer to...

  • Page 25: Getting Started

    Since the IP phone is a data terminal, digitized audio being just another type of data from its perspective, the phone is capable of vastly more than traditional business phones. Moreover, Yealink IP phones run the same protocols as your office personal computer, which means that many innovative applications can be developed without resorting to specialized technology.

  • Page 26: Initialization Process Overview

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones There are many ways to set up a phone network using Yealink IP phones. The following shows an example of a network setup: Initialization Process Overview The initialization process of the IP phone is responsible for network connectivity and operation of the IP phone in your local network.
  • Page 27 Getting Started During the initialization process, the following events take place: Loading the ROM file The ROM file resides in the flash memory of the IP phone. The IP phone comes from the factory with a ROM file preloaded. During initialization, the IP phone runs a bootstrap loader that loads and executes the ROM file.

  • Page 28: Verifying Startup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones service. These resource files are optional, but if some particular features are being deployed, these files are required. The followings show examples of resource files: Language packs  Ring tones ...

  • Page 29: Setting Up Your System

    It also provides instructions on how to set up a provisioning server, how to deploy Yealink IP phones from the provisioning server, how to upgrade firmware, and how to keep user personalized settings after auto provisioning.

  • Page 30: Dhcp

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones DHCP DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a network protocol used to dynamically allocate network parameters to network hosts. The automatic allocation of network parameters to hosts eases the administrative burden of maintaining an IP network. IP phones comply with the DHCP specifications documented in 2131.
  • Page 31 Setting Up Your System To configure DHCP via web user interface: Click on Network->Basic. In the IPv4 Config block, mark the DHCP radio box. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 32 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones rk&q=load Configure the static DNS feature. Phone User Interface Configure static DNS address. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.static_dns_enable 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the static DNS feature to on or off.
  • Page 33 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the secondary IPv4 DNS server. Example: static.network.secondary_dns = 202.101.103.54 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter "static.network.static_dns_enable" is set to 1 (On). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Basic->IPv4 Config->Static IP Address->Secondary DNS Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 34: Dhcp Option

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Press OK to reboot the phone. DHCP Option DHCP provides a framework for passing information to TCP/IP network devices. Network and other control information are carried in tagged data items that are stored in the options field of the DHCP message.
  • Page 35 Setting Up Your System server address is required. Connecting to the secondary DHCP server that responds to DHCP INFORM queries with a requested provisioning server address is one possibility. For more information, refer to 3925. If a single alternate DHCP server responds, this is functionally equivalent to the scenario where the primary DHCP server responds with a valid provisioning server address.
  • Page 36 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Off 1-On, the IP phone will obtain the provisioning server address by detecting DHCP options. Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->DHCP Active Phone User Interface: None Integer static.auto_provision.dhcp_option.list_user_options...
  • Page 37 Click Confirm to accept the change. DHCP Option 42 and Option 2 Yealink IP phones support using the NTP server address offered by DHCP. DHCP option 42 is used to specify a list of NTP servers available to the client by IP address. NTP servers should be listed in order of preference.
  • Page 38 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default String within 99 Refer to the static.network.dhcp_host_name characters following content Description: Configures the DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP phone. For SIP-T54S IP phones: The default value is SIP-T54S.
  • Page 39 Setting Up Your System Parameter Permitted Values Default The default value is SIP-T27G. For SIP-T23P IP phones: The default value is SIP-T23P. For SIP-T23G IP phones: The default value is SIP-T23G. For SIP-T21P E2 IP phones: The default value is SIP-T21P_E2. For SIP-T21 E2 IP phones: The default value is SIP-T21_E2.

  • Page 40: Configuring Network Parameters Manually

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. Configuring Network Parameters Manually If DHCP is disabled or IP phones cannot obtain network parameters from the DHCP server, you need to configure them manually.
  • Page 41 Setting Up Your System Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.internet_port.type 0 or 2 Description: Configures the Internet port type for IPv4. 0-DHCP 2-Static IP Address Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.ip_address_mode” is set to 0 (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 &...
  • Page 42 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Network->Basic->IPv4 Config->Static IP Address->IP Address Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv4->Type (Static IP)->IP Address static.network.internet_port.mask Subnet Mask Blank Description: Configures the IPv4 subnet mask.
  • Page 43 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: static.network.primary_dns = 202.101.103.55 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.ip_address_mode” is set to 0 (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6), and “static.network.internet_port.type” is set to 2 (Static IP Address). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 44 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure a static IPv4 address via web user interface: Click on Network->Basic. In the IPv4 Config block, mark the Static IP Address radio box. Enter the desired values in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, Primary DNS and Secondary DNS fields.

  • Page 45: Configuring Transmission Methods Of The Internet Port And Pc Port

    Configuring Transmission Methods of the Internet Port and PC Port Yealink IP phones support two Ethernet ports: Internet port and PC port. You can enable or disable the PC port on the IP phones. Three optional methods of transmission configuration for...
  • Page 46 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Full-duplex Full-duplex transmission refers to transmitting voice or data in both directions at the same time; this means one device can send data on the line while receiving data. You can configure the...
  • Page 47 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default 2-Full Duplex 100Mbps 3-Half Duplex 10Mbps 4-Half Duplex 100Mbps 5-Full Duplex 1000Mbps (only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T40G/T29G/T27G/T23G IP phones) Note: For SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T40G/T29G/T27G/T23G IP phones, you can set the transmission speed to 1000Mbps/Auto Negotiation to transmit in 1000Mbps if the IP phone is connected to the switch supports Gigabit Ethernet.

  • Page 48: Configuring Pc Port Mode

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure the transmission methods of Ethernet ports via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of WAN Port Link. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of PC Port Link.
  • Page 49 Setting Up Your System Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 static.network.pc_port.enable Description: Enables or disables the PC port. 0-Disabled 1-Auto Negotiation Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->PC Port->PC Port Active Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 50: Web Server Type

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select Disabled from the pull-down list of PC Port Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 51 Setting Up Your System When you disable user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol (take HTTPS protocol for example): Procedure Web server type can be configured using the following methods. Configure the web access type, HTTP port and HTTPS port.
  • Page 52 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP protocol. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 53 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the HTTPS port for the user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTPS protocol. Note: Please take care when choosing an alternate port. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 54: Wi-Fi

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure web server type via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->Web Server. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the HTTP Status field.
  • Page 55 Setting Up Your System Configure the Wi-Fi settings. Parameters: static.wifi.X.label static.wifi.X.ssid static.wifi.X.priority static.wifi.X.security_mode static.wifi.X.cipher_type static.wifi.X.password static.wifi.X.eap_type static.wifi.X.eap_user_name static.wifi.X.eap_password static.wifi.show_scan_prompt Configure Wi-Fi feature. Configure the Wi-Fi settings. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=netwo rk-wifi&q=load Configure Wi-Fi feature. Phone User Interface Configure the Wi-Fi settings. Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values...
  • Page 56 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the profile name of the wireless network X for the IP phone. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.wifi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G IP phones.
  • Page 57 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default or WPA2-EAP Description: Configures the security mode of the wireless network X. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.wifi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Network->Wi-Fi->Secure Mode Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 58 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Network->Wi-Fi->PSK Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Wi-Fi->Wi-Fi (On)->Known Network (press Add)->WPA Shared Key or Menu->Basic->Wi-Fi->Wi-Fi (On)->Known Network->Option->Edit->WPA Shared Key static.wifi.X.eap_type TTLS, PEAP or TLS Blank...
  • Page 59 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.wifi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled) and “static.wifi.X.security_mode” is set to WPA-EAP or WPA2-EAP. It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Network->Wi-Fi->PSK Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 60 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To add a wireless network via web user interface: Click on Network->Wi-Fi. Enter the desired value in the Profile Name field. Enter the desired value in the SSID field. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Secure Mode.
  • Page 61 Setting Up Your System Click to select the desired wireless network which you want to adjust the priority, and then click Repeat the step 2 to adjust the priority of more wireless networks. To enable the Wi-Fi feature via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Wi-Fi.

  • Page 62: Vlan

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones VLAN VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) is used to logically divide a physical network into several broadcast domains. VLAN membership can be configured through software instead of physically relocating devices or connections. Grouping devices with a common set of requirements regardless of their physical location can greatly simplify network design.
  • Page 63 Setting Up Your System Parameter Permitted Values Default The priority of each method is: LLDP/CDP>Manual>DHCP VLAN. Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None LLDP LLDP (Linker Layer Discovery Protocol) is a vendor-neutral Link Layer protocol, which allows IP...
  • Page 64 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.lldp.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the LLDP (Linker Layer Discovery Protocol) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, the IP phone will attempt to determine its VLAN ID through LLDP.
  • Page 65 Setting Up Your System Enter the desired time interval in the Packet Interval (1~3600s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. To configure LLDP feature via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->LLDP->LLDP Status.
  • Page 66 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= network-adv&q=load Configure CDP feature. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.cdp.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) feature on the IP phone.
  • Page 67 Setting Up Your System Enter the desired time interval in the Packet Interval (1~3600s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. To configure CDP feature via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->CDP->CDP Status.
  • Page 68 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure VLAN for the Internet port and PC port manually. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=network -adv&q=load Configure VLAN for the Internet port and PC Phone User Interface port manually.
  • Page 69 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.vlan.internet_port_priority Integer from 0 to 7 Description: Configures VLAN priority for the Internet port. 7 is the highest priority, 0 is the lowest priority. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.vlan.internet_port_enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 70 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->VLAN->PC Port->VID Number static.network.vlan.pc_port_priority Integer from 0 to 7 Description: Configures VLAN priority for the PC port. 7 is the highest priority, 0 is the lowest priority.
  • Page 71 Setting Up Your System To configure VLAN for PC port via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the PC Port block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active. Enter the VLAN ID in the VID (1-4094) field. Select the desired value (0-7) from the pull-down list of Priority.
  • Page 72 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure DHCP VLAN can be configured using the following methods. Configure DHCP VLAN discovery feature. Central Provisioning Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg (Configuration File) static.network.vlan.dhcp_enable static.network.vlan.dhcp_option Configure DHCP VLAN discovery feature. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=...
  • Page 73 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VLAN->DHCP VLAN->Option (1-255) Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->VLAN->DHCP VLAN->Option To configure DHCP VLAN discovery via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the DHCP VLAN block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active. Enter the desired option in the Option (1-255) field.

  • Page 74: Ipv6 Support

    IPv6 is developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) to deal with the long-anticipated problem of IPv4 address exhaustion. Yealink IP Phone supports IPv4 addressing mode, IPv6 addressing mode, as well as an IPv4&IPv6 dual stack addressing mode. IPv4 uses a 32-bit address, consisting of four groups of three decimal digits separated by dots;...
  • Page 75 Setting Up Your System How the IP phone obtains the IPv6 address and network settings? The following table lists where the IP phone obtains the IPv6 address and other network settings: SLAAC How the IP phone obtains the IPv6 address and network DHCPv6 (ICMPv6) settings?
  • Page 76 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure the IPv6 static DNS. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=net work&q=load Configure the IPv6 address assignment method. Phone User Interface Configure the IPv6 static DNS address. Configure the IPv6 static DNS. Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 77 Setting Up Your System Permitted Parameters Default Values Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv6->Type static.network.ipv6_static_dns_enable 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the static IPv6 DNS feature to on or off. 0-Off, the IP phone will use the IPv6 DNS obtained from DHCP. 1-On, the IP phone will use manually configured static IPv6 DNS.
  • Page 78 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.ip_address_mode” is set to 1 (IPv6) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6), and "static.network.ipv6_internet_port.type" is set to 1 (Static IP Address).
  • Page 79 Setting Up Your System Permitted Parameters Default Values Network->Basic->IPv6 Config->Static IP Address->Primary DNS Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv6->Type (Static IP) ->Pri.DNS Or Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv6->Type (DHCP) ->Static DNS (Enabled) ->Pri.DNS static.network.ipv6_secondary_dns IPv6 address Blank Description: Configures the secondary IPv6 DNS server.
  • Page 80 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->ICMPv6 Status->Active Phone User Interface: None To configure IPv6 address assignment method via web user interface: Click on Network->Basic. Select the desired address mode (IPv6 or IPv4 & IPv6) from the pull-down list of Mode(IPv4/IPv6).
  • Page 81 Setting Up Your System (Optional.) If you mark the DHCP radio box, you can configure the static DNS address in the corresponding fields. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 82 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones In the ICMPv6 Status block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.

  • Page 83: Vpn

    (ca.crt and client.crt), key (client.key) and the configuration file (vpn.cnf) of the VPN client. The following table lists the unified directories of the OpenVPN certificates and key in the configuration file (vpn.cnf) for Yealink IP phones: VPN files Description Unified Directories ca.crt...
  • Page 84 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones VPN files Description Unified Directories client.crt Client certificate /config/openvpn/keys/client.crt client.key Private key of the client /config/openvpn/keys/client.key OpenVPN Feature on Yealink IP phones For more information, refer to Procedure VPN can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 85 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the access URL of the *.tar file for OpenVPN. Example: static.openvpn.url = http://192.168.10.25/OpenVPN.tar Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VPN->Upload VPN Config Phone User Interface: None To upload a TAR file and configure VPN via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced.

  • Page 86: Network Address Translation (Nat)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure VPN via phone user interface after uploading a TAR file: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->VPN. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the VPN Active field.

  • Page 87: Nat Traversal

    NAT gateways, typically required for client-to-client networking applications, especially for VoIP deployments. Yealink IP phones support three NAT traversal techniques: manual NAT, STUN and ICE. If manual NAT and STUN are all enabled, the IP phone will use the manually configured external IP address for NAT traversal.
  • Page 88 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs) STUN is a network protocol, used in NAT traversal for applications of real-time voice, video, messaging, and other interactive IP communications. The STUN protocol allows entities behind...
  • Page 89 Setting Up Your System TURN (Traversal Using Relays around NAT) TURN is a network protocol described in 5766, allows a host located behind a NAT (called the TURN client) to communicate and exchange packets with other hosts (peers, called the TURN server) using a relay.
  • Page 90 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones media path in the same network would be chosen, which will probably have better quality than the long one. ICE is a complex solution to the problem of NAT traversal. Due to its complexity there is very limited client support for ICE today.
  • Page 91 Setting Up Your System static.sip.nat_turn.password Configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port. Parameters: sip.listen_port sip.tls_listen_port Configure NAT traversal on a per-line basis. <MAC>.cfg Parameter: account.X.nat.nat_traversal Configure manual NAT feature on a phone basis. Configure ICE feature. Configure TURN feature and TURN server. Configure STUN feature and STUN server on a phone basis.
  • Page 92 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 93 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the port of the STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs) server. Example: sip.nat_stun.port = 3478 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.sip.nat_stun.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 94 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None static.network.static_nat.addr IP address Blank Description: Configures the IP address to be advertised in SIP signaling. It should match the external IP address used by the NAT device.
  • Page 95 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default effect. Web User Interface: Network->NAT->TURN->Active Phone User Interface: None IP address or static.sip.nat_turn.server Blank domain name Description: Configures the IP address or the domain name of the TURN (Traversal Using Relays around NAT) server.
  • Page 96 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the user name to authenticate to TURN (Traversal Using Relays around NAT) server. Example: sip.nat_turn.username = admin Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.sip.nat_turn.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 97 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the local TLS listen port. If it is set to 0, the IP phone will not listen the TLS service. Web User Interface: Settings->SIP->TLS SIP Port Phone User Interface: None X is the account ID.
  • Page 98 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Enter the external IP address in the IP Address field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 99 Setting Up Your System Select STUN/Manual NAT from the pull-down list of NAT. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port via web user interface: Click on Settings->SIP. Enter the desired local SIP port in the Local SIP Port field. Enter the desired TLS SIP port in the TLS SIP Port field.
  • Page 100 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure NAT traversal and STUN server via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->NAT->NAT Status. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the NAT Status field.
  • Page 101 Setting Up Your System ccount-adv&q=load&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.nat.udp_update_enable 0, 1, 2 or 3 Description: Configures the type of keep-alive packets sent by the IP phone to the NAT device to keep the communication port open so that NAT can continue to function for a specific account. 0-Disabled, the IP phone will not send keep-alive packets.
  • Page 102 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Keep Alive Type. Enter the keep-alive interval in the Keep Alive Interval(Seconds) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Rport The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) operates over UDP and TCP. When used with UDP, responses to requests are returned to the source address the request came from, and returned to the port written into the topmost “Via”...

  • Page 103: Quality Of Service (Qos)

    Setting Up Your System Parameter Permitted Values Default Enables or disables NAT Rport feature for a specific account. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled 2-Enable Direct Process Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->RPort Phone User Interface: None X is the account ID. For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-16; for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S, X=1-12; for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G, X=1-6;...

  • Page 104: Voice Qos

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Shaping network traffic  Setting traffic priorities across the network  The Best-Effort service is the default QoS model in IP networks. It provides no guarantees for data delivering, which means delay, jitter, packet loss and bandwidth allocation are unpredictable.
  • Page 105 Setting Up Your System Procedure QoS can be configured using the following methods. Configure the DSCPs for voice packets and SIP packets. Central Provisioning Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg (Configuration File) static.network.qos.audiotos static.network.qos.signaltos Configure the DSCPs for voice packets and SIP packets. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =network-adv&q=load...

  • Page 106: 802.1X Authentication

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None To configure DSCPs for voice packets and SIP packets via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. Enter the desired value in the Voice QoS (0~63) field.
  • Page 107 If the authentication server determines the credentials are valid, the IP phone is allowed to access resources located on the protected side of the network. Yealink IP phones support the following protocols for 802.1X authentication: EAP-MD5 ...
  • Page 108 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones static.network.802_1x.anonymous_identity static.network.802_1x.identity static.network.802_1x.md5_password static.network.802_1x.root_cert_url static.network.802_1x.client_cert_url Configure the 802.1X authentication. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=netwo rk-adv&q=load Configure the 802.1X authentication. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.network.802_1x.mode...
  • Page 109 Configures the identity (or user name) for 802.1x authentication. Example: static.network.802_1x.identity = yealink Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.802_1x.mode” is set to 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change...
  • Page 110 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->802.1x->Identity Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->802.1x->Identity String within 32 static.network.802_1x.md5_password Blank characters Description: Configures the password for 802.1x authentication.
  • Page 111 Setting Up Your System Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the access URL of the device certificate. Example: static.network.802_1x.client_cert_url = http://192.168.1.10/client.pem Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.802_1x.mode” is set to 2 (EAP-TLS). The format of the device certificate must be *.pem. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->802.1x->Device Certificates Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 112 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Leave the MD5 Password field blank. In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system. In the Device Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired client (*.pem or *.cer) certificate from your local system.
  • Page 113 Setting Up Your System Click Upload to upload the certificate. If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field. Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field. In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system.
  • Page 114 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones If you select EAP-PEAP/GTC: (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field. Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
  • Page 115 Setting Up Your System In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system. Click Upload to upload the certificate. If you select EAP-FAST: Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Provisioning Mode. (Optional.) Enter the anonymous user name for authentication in the Anonymous Identity field.
  • Page 116 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The CA certificate needs to be uploaded only when Authenticated Provisioning mode is selected from the Provisioning Mode field. Click Upload to upload the certificate. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 117: Setting Up Your Phones With A Provisioning Server

    Setting Up Your System If you select EAP-PEAP/GTC: Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field. If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-GTC: Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.

  • Page 118: Provisioning Methods

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones previous settings. Provisioning Methods IP phones can be configured automatically through configuration files stored on a central provisioning server, manually via web user interface or phone user interface, or by a combination of the automatic and manual methods.
  • Page 119 Resource Files on page 103. Yealink IP phones support keeping user personalized configuration settings using the MAC-local CFG file. For more information on this file, refer to MAC-local CFG File on page 102.

  • Page 120: Phone User Interface

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones call log files and contact files to the provisioning server. You can configure a separate directory for each of these files to help organize: a log file directory, a call log file directory and a contact file directory.

  • Page 121: Boot Files, Configuration Files And Resource Files

     Boot Files Yealink IP phones running firmware version 81 or later support a new boot file in which you can customize the download sequence of configuration files. It is efficiently for you to provision your IP phones in different deployment scenarios, especially when you want to apply a set of features or settings to a group of phones.
  • Page 122 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones include:config “http://10.2.5.206/configure/account.cfg” overwrite_mode = 1 Learn the following: The line beginning with “#” is considered to be a comment.  The file header “#!version:1.0.0.1” is not a comment and must be placed in the first line. It ...

  • Page 123: Configuration Files

    The configuration files are valid CFG files that can be created or edited using a text editor such as UltraEdit. An administrator can deploy and maintain a mass of Yealink IP phones automatically through configuration files stored on a provisioning server.
  • Page 124 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones IP Phone Model Common CFG file SIP-T27P y000000000045.cfg SIP-T27G y000000000069.cfg SIP-T23P/G y000000000044.cfg SIP-T21(P) E2 y000000000052.cfg SIP-T19(P) E2 y000000000053.cfg MAC-Oriented CFG File MAC-Oriented CFG file, named <MAC>.cfg, contains parameters unique to a particular phone, such as account registration.

  • Page 125: Resource Files

    Setting Up Your System Users can also select to clear the user personalized configuration settings. Users can clear the MAC-local CFG file using the following methods: To clear the MAC-local CFG file, reset the IP phone to factory configuration settings by ...
  • Page 126 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Local contact file  Input method file  For more information on resource files, refer to Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files on page 105. If you want to delete resource files from a phone at a later date - for example, if you are giving the phone to a new user - you can reset the IP phone to factory configuration settings.
  • Page 127 Obtaining Boot Files/Configuration Files/Resource Files Yealink supplies some template configuration files and resource files for you, so you can directly edit and customize the files as required. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for template files. You can also obtain the template files online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 128 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Template File Description File Name For example, Allow you to customize the translation of the existing language on the 000.GUI.English.lang Language Packs phone/web user interface. For more information, refer to Loading 1.English_note.xml...
  • Page 129 Setting Up Your System Template File Description File Name information, refer to Customizing a Directory Template File on page 299. Allows you to customize the search source list for your IP phone. For Super Search super_search.xml more information, refer to Customizing a Super Search Template File Template on page 303.

  • Page 130: Setting Up A Provisioning Server

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To download template files: Go to Yealink Document Download page and select the desired phone model. Download and extract the combined files to your local system. For example, the following illustration shows the template files available for SIP-T46G IP phones running firmware version 81.

  • Page 131: Supported Provisioning Protocols

    Configuring Basic Features Supported Provisioning Protocols  Configuring a Provisioning Server  Deploying Phones from the Provisioning Server  Why Using a Provisioning Server? You can use a provisioning server to configure your IP phones. A provisioning server allows for flexibility in upgrading, maintaining and configuring the phone.

  • Page 132: Deploying Phones From The Provisioning Server

    Otherwise, configurations may not take effect, and the IP phone will behave without exception. Before you configure parameters in the configuration files, Yealink recommends that you create new configuration files containing only those parameters that require changes.

  • Page 133: Upgrading Firmware

    Configuring Basic Features Edit the parameters in the file as desired. Create new common configuration files by performing the following steps: Create <y0000000000xx>.cfg files by using the Common CFG file from the distribution as templates. Edit the parameters in the file as desired. Copy boot files and configuration files to the home directory of the provisioning server.
  • Page 134 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Automatically, from the provisioning server for a mass of phones.  The following table lists the associated and latest firmware name for each IP phone model (X is replaced by the actual firmware version).
  • Page 135 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure the way for the IP phone to check for configuration files. Parameters: static.auto_provision.power_on static.auto_provision.repeat.enable static.auto_provision.repeat.minutes static.auto_provision.weekly.enable static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval static.auto_provision.inactivity_time_expire Central static.auto_provision.weekly.begin_time Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cf static.auto_provision.weekly.end_time (Configuration static.auto_provision.weekly.dayofweek File) static.auto_provision.flexible.enable static.auto_provision.flexible.interval static.auto_provision.flexible.begin_time...
  • Page 136 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Triggers the power on feature to on or off. 0-Off 1-On, the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process when powered on. Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Power On...
  • Page 137 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-On, the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process weekly. Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Weekly Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval Integer from 0 to 12 Description: Configures the time interval (in weeks) for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning. If it is set to 0, the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process at the specific day(s) configured by the parameter “static.auto_provision.weekly.dayofweek”...
  • Page 138 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None Time from 00:00 to static.auto_provision.weekly.begin_time 00:00 23:59 Description: Configures the starting time of the day for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process weekly.
  • Page 139 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 4-Thursday 5-Friday 6-Saturday Example: static.auto_provision.weekly.dayofweek = 01 If the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval” is set to 0, it means the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process every Sunday and Monday. If the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.weekly_upgrade_interval”...
  • Page 140 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The auto provisioning occurs on a random day within this period based on the phone's MAC address. Example: static.auto_provision.flexible.interval = 30 The IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process on a random day (for example, 18) based on the phone's MAC address.
  • Page 141 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default process at random between the starting time on that day and ending time in the next day. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.flexible.enable” is set to 1 (On). Web User Interface: Settings->Auto Provision->Flexible Time Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 142 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Make the desired change. Click Confirm to accept the change. When the “Power On” is set to On, the IP phone will check boot files and configuration files stored on the provisioning server during startup and then will download firmware from the server.

  • Page 143: Keeping User Personalized Settings After Auto Provisioning

    (for example, ring tones, wallpaper, dial plan, time format or DSS keys), after auto provisioning. These specific scenarios are applicable to Yealink IP phones. The following demonstrated specific scenarios are taking SIP-T46G IP phones as example for reference.
  • Page 144 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configuration Parameters The following table lists the configuration parameters used to determine the phone behavior for keeping user personalized settings: Parameters Permitted Values Default static.auto_provision.custom.protect 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to keep user personalized settings after auto provisioning.
  • Page 145 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the URL for uploading/downloading the <MAC>-local.cfg file. If it is left blank, the IP phone will try to upload/download the <MAC>-local.cfg file to/from the root directory of provisioning server. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter "static.auto_provision.custom.sync" is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 146 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones SIP-T46G IP phone target firmware version: 28.82.0.20. This firmware supports keeping  personalized settings and generating a <MAC>-local.cfg file. SIP-T46G IP phone MAC: 001565770984  Provisioning server URL: tftp://192.168.1.211 ...
  • Page 147 Configuring Basic Features Scenario Operations II: Edit the following parameters in the y000000000028.cfg file you want the IP phone to download: static.auto_provision.custom.protect = 1 static.auto_provision.custom.sync = 0 static.firmware.url = tftp://192.168.1.211/28.82.0.20.rom Trigger the IP phone to perform the auto provisioning process. For more information on Triggering the IP Phone to Perform the how to trigger auto provisioning process, refer to Auto Provisioning...
  • Page 148 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Scenario Conditions: SIP-T46G IP phone MAC: 001565770984  The current firmware of the phone is 28.82.0.20 or later.  Provisioning server URL: tftp://192.168.1.211  static.auto_provision.custom.protect = 1  The Reset local settings option on the web/phone user interface appears only if the value of the Note parameter “static.auto_provision.custom.protect”...
  • Page 149 Configuring Basic Features Click Reset local settings. The web user interface prompts “Clear local.cfg settings?”. Click OK. Configurations in the 001565770984-local.cfg file saved on the phone will be cleared. If the IP phone is triggered to perform auto provisioning after resetting local configuration, it will download the configuration files from the provisioning server and update the configurations to the phone system.
  • Page 150 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To reset the phone to factory via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Reset Config. Select Reset to Factory Settings. The LCD screen prompts “Reset to factory setting?”.
  • Page 151 Configuring Basic Features or 001565770984.cfg). Trigger the phone to perform the auto provisioning process. As the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.custom.sync” is set to 1, the IP phone will download the 001565770984-local.cfg file from the provisioning server to override the one stored on the phone.
  • Page 152 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To import local configuration file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration. In the Import CFG Configuration File field, click Browse to locate the 001565770984-local.cfg file from your local system.

  • Page 153: Configuring Basic Features

    Configuring Basic Features Configuring Basic Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following basic features: Power Indicator LED  Notification Popups  Contrast  Wallpaper  Transparency  Screen Saver  Power Saving  Backlight  Idle Clock ...
  • Page 154 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Emergency Dialplan  Hotline  Off Hook Hot Line Dialing  Directory List  Search Source List In Dialing  Call Log  Call List Show Number  Missed Call Log ...

  • Page 155: Power Indicator Led

    Configuring Basic Features Transfer Mode via Dsskey  Allow Trans Exist Call  Directed Call Pickup  Group Call Pickup  Dialog Info Call Pickup  Recent Call In Dialing  ReCall  Call Number Filter  Call Park  Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) ...
  • Page 156 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones When a call is muted.  When a call is placed on hold or is held.  When the IP phone is busy.  When the IP phone misses a call.
  • Page 157 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Features->Power LED->Common Power Light On Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.ring_power_led_flash_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone receives an incoming call. SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27 P/T27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED does not flash) 1-Enabled (power indicator LED fast flashes (300ms) red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones:...
  • Page 158 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Features->Power LED->Voice/Text Mail Power Light Flash Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.mute_power_led_flash_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when a call is muted.
  • Page 159 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.talk_and_dial_power_led_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to be turned on when the IP phone is busy. SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27 P/T27G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED is off) 1-Enabled (power indicator LED is solid red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED is off)

  • Page 160: Notification Popups

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Ringing Power Light Flash. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Voice/Text Mail Power Light Flash. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Mute Power Light Flash.
  • Page 161 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Notification popups can be configured using the following methods. Configure notification popups. Parameters: features.voice_mail_popup.enable Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.c features.missed_call_popup.enable (Configuration File) features.forward_call_popup.enable features.text_message_popup.enable Configure notification popups. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=feature s-notifypop&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default...
  • Page 162 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the pop-up message box when it misses a call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.missed_calllog” is set to 1 (Enabled).

  • Page 163: Contrast

    Configuring Basic Features To configure the notification popups via web user interface: Click on Features->Notification Popups. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Voice Mail Popup. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Missed Call Popup. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Forward Call Popup.
  • Page 164 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones phone_setting.contrast Configure the contrast of the LCD screen. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-preference&q=load Configure the contrast of the LCD Phone User Interface screen. Details of the Configuration Parameter:...

  • Page 165: Wallpaper

    For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones, you can also set a custom picture stored in your USB flash drive as the wallpaper. In order to do this, make sure the USB flash drive containing pictures is Yealink phone-specific user guide connected to your phone. For more information, refer to...
  • Page 166 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones When the DSS key list is unfolded (tap More key when the phone is idle): When the DSS key list is folded (tap Hide key when the DSS key list is unfolded): The wallpaper will display on the entire screen.
  • Page 167 Configuring Basic Features Single File Phone Model Format Resolution Note Size SIP-T46G/T46S <=1.8 <=5MB /T29G megapixels Procedure Wallpaper can be configured using the following methods. Configure the wallpaper displayed on the IP phone. Parameter: phone_setting.backgrounds Configure the wallpaper displayed on the expansion module.
  • Page 168 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones expansion module. Configure the wallpaper with DSSkey unfold. Details of the Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values Refer to the phone_setting.backgrounds following Default.jpg content Description: Configures the wallpaper displayed on the IP phone idle screen.
  • Page 169 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Settings->Preference->Wallpaper for expansion modules Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->EXP Wallpaper->Wallpaper URL within wallpaper_upload.url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the wallpaper image. Example: wallpaper_upload.url = http://192.168.10.25/wallpaper.jpg Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. The format of the wallpaper image must be *jpg, *.png, *.bmp or *.jpeg.
  • Page 170 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To upload custom wallpaper via web user interface (take SIP-T48G IP phones for example): Click on Settings->Preference. In the Upload Wallpaper(800*480) field, click Browse to locate the wallpaper image from your local system.
  • Page 171 Configuring Basic Features Select the desired wallpaper from the pull-down list of Wallpaper with DSSkey unfold. Click Confirm to accept the change. To change the wallpaper for expansion modules via web user interface (take SIP-T54S IP phones for example): Click on Settings->Preference. Select the desired wallpaper from the pull-down list of Wallpaper for expansion modules.

  • Page 172: Transparency

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Tap the Save soft key to accept the change. To change the wallpaper for expansion modules via phone user interface (take SIP-T54S IP phones for example): Press Menu->Basic->Display->EXP Wallpaper. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired wait time from the Wallpaper field.
  • Page 173 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Transparency can be configured using the following methods. Configure the transparency of the LCD screen. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) phone_setting.idle_dsskey_and_title. transparency Configure the transparency of the LCD screen. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-preference&q=load Configure the transparency of the Phone User Interface...

  • Page 174: Screen Saver

    Yealink phone-specific user guide connected to your phone. For more information, refer to Yealink IP phones support displaying XML items (for example, notifications or company logo) on the screen saver. You can configure a screen saver XML template file to customize the XML items.

  • Page 175: Customizing A Screen Saver Xml Template File

    Configuring Basic Features Single File Phone Model Format Resolution Note Size phone <=2.0 SIP-T48G/S <=5MB megapixels SIP-T46G/T46S <=1.8 <=5MB /T29G megapixels The following shows that the built-in screen saver is displaying on the phone: Customizing a Screen Saver XML Template File You can customize the screen saver XML template file to configure the IP phone whether to display following XML items on the screen saver: Time and date...
  • Page 176 Press the corresponding XML Browser DSS key.  Before customizing, you need to obtain the screen saver XML template file. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for screen saver XML template. You can also obtain the screen saver XML template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 177 Configuring Basic Features Parameter Position Value Description SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T4 SIP-T54S/T52S/T 6S/T29G IP phones. 46G/T46S/T29G IP phones: Integer from 0 to “show” Whether to display the time and SystemTime Body date. ”hide” Font size of the text. “normal” “small”: 12 pt “small” SystemTime Size “normal”: 18 pt...
  • Page 178 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Position Value Description RGB(123,4,140)) “show” StatusIcons Body Whether to display the status icons. ”hide” “left” horizontalAli StatusIcons Horizontal position of the status “middle” icons. “right” “top” StatusIcons verticalAlign “middle”...
  • Page 179 Configuring Basic Features Parameter Position Value Description “magenta” “cyan” “lightgray” “darkgray” “lightred” “lightgreen” “yellow” “lightblue” “lightmagenta” “lightcyan” or RGB values (for example, 123,4,40 or RGB(123,4,140)) The access URL of the image. Note: It is only applicable to Image Body string SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T4 6S/T29G IP phones.
  • Page 180 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Position Value Description SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T4 6S/T29G IP phones. Customizing a screen saver xml file: Open the screen saver xml file using an ASCII editor. Modify settings as you want in the screen saver xml file.
  • Page 181 Configuring Basic Features Configure the IP phone to display the clock and icons when the screen saver starts. Parameter: screensaver.display_clock.enable Configure the interval for the IP phone to change the picture when the screen saver starts. Parameter: screensaver.picture_change_interval Configure the interval for the IP phone to move the clock and icons when the screen saver starts.
  • Page 182 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dsske y&q=load&model=0 Configure the screen saver wait time on the IP phone. Phone User Interface Assign a XML Browser DSS key. Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default...
  • Page 183 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default display all images alternately. The time interval is configured by the parameter “screensaver.picture_change_interval”. 2-Server XML, the LCD screen will display XML items (configured by the parameter “screensaver.xml_browser.url”) when screen saver starts. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S, SIP-T52S, SIP-T48G/S, SIP-T46G/S and SIP-T29G IP phones.
  • Page 184 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the HTTP provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the screen saver xml file “ScreenSaver.xml”. Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Screensaver Type (Server XML)->XML Browser URL...
  • Page 185 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Basic->Display->Screensaver(System/Custom)->Display Clock Integer from 5 to screensaver.picture_change_interval 1200 Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to change the picture when the screen saver starts. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “screensaver.type” is set to 1 (Custom) and the parameter “screensaver.upload_url”...
  • Page 186 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.type programablekey.X.type expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a directed call pickup DSS key on the IP phone. Note: EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones.
  • Page 187 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 characters (X ranges from 1 to 21) Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones.
  • Page 188 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The Upload Screensaver field appears only if Screensaver Type is set to Custom. The custom screen saver appears in the pull-down list of Screensaver. The Screensaver field appears only if Screensaver Type is set to Custom.
  • Page 189 Configuring Basic Features Click Confirm to accept the change. To set the system screen saver via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference. Select System from the pull-down list of Screensaver Type. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the screen saver wait time and screensaver display clock via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference.
  • Page 190 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure a XML Browser DSS key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select Direct Pickup from the pull-down list of Type.

  • Page 191: Power Saving

    Configuring Basic Features Power Saving The power-saving feature is used to turn off the backlight and screen (turning off the screen is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones and EXP50 expansion module (connected to the SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones) to conserve energy. The IP phone and EXP50 (if connected) enter power-saving mode after the phone has been idle for a certain period of time.
  • Page 192 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones File) Configure the power saving feature. Parameter: features.power_saving.enable Configure the office hour. Parameters: features.power_saving.office_hour.monday features.power_saving.office_hour.tuesday features.power_saving.office_hour.wednesday features.power_saving.office_hour.thursday features.power_saving.office_hour.friday features.power_saving.office_hour.saturday features.power_saving.office_hour.sunday Configure the idle timeout. Parameters: features.power_saving.office_hour.idle_timeout features.power_saving.off_hour.idle_timeout features.power_saving.user_input_ext.idle_timeout Configure the flashing period of the power indicator LED in the power-saving mode.
  • Page 193 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled, the IP phone stays in power-saving mode even if the office hour arrives the next day. 1-Enabled, the IP phone will automatically identify the office hour and exit power-saving mode once the office hour arrives the next day. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 194 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the time (in minutes) to wait in the idle state before the IP phone enters power-saving mode during the non-office hours. Example: features.power_saving.off_hour.idle_timeout = 5 The IP phone will enter power-saving mode when it has been inactivated for 5 minutes during the non-office hours.
  • Page 195 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Starting time and ending time are separated by a comma. Example: features.power_saving.office_hour.monday = 7,19 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Power Saving->Monday/Tuesday/Wednesday/Thursday/Friday/Saturday/Sunday Phone User Interface: None 0, Integer from 100 features.power_saving.power_led_flash.on_time to 10000...

  • Page 196: Backlight

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure the power saving feature via web user interface: Click on Settings->Power Saving. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Power Saving. Enter the starting time and ending time respectively in the desired day field.
  • Page 197 Configuring Basic Features SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S IP phones and the connected EXP40, SIP-T29G IP phones and the connected EXP20. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Note Before you adjust the LCD’s backlight of expansion module, make sure the expansion module has been connected to the IP phone.
  • Page 198 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones gs-preference&q=load Configure the backlight of the LCD screen. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.active_backlight_level Integer from 1 to 10 Description: Configures the intensity of the LCD screen when the phone is active.
  • Page 199 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Unused BackLight Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->Backlight->Inactive Level Refer to the 0, 1, 15, 30, 60, 120, 300, phone_setting.backlight_time following 600 or 1800 content Description: Configures the delay time (in seconds) to change the intensity of the LCD screen when the IP phone is inactive.

  • Page 200: Idle Clock Display

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Backlight Time(seconds). Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the backlight via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Display->Backlight. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired level from the Active Level field.

  • Page 201: Bluetooth

    After connecting the Bluetooth-Enabled mobile phone, you can synchronize the mobile contacts to the IP phone. For SIP-T54S/T52S IP phones, you can also Yealink make and receive mobile calls on IP phone. For more information, refer to the phone-specific user guide .
  • Page 202 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Bluetooth mode can be configured using the following methods. Configure Bluetooth mode. Parameter: features.bluetooth_enable Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg (Configuration File) Configure the Bluetooth device name. Parameter: features.bluetooth_adapter_name Configure Bluetooth mode.
  • Page 203 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value is Yealink T54S. For SIP-T52S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T52S. For SIP-T48G IP phones: The default value is Yealink T48G. For SIP-T48S IP phones: The default value is Yealink T48S.

  • Page 204: Page Switch Key

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Bluetooth Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. To activate the Bluetooth mode via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Bluetooth. Press , or the Switch soft key to select On from the Bluetooth field.

  • Page 205: Enable Page Tips

    Configuring Basic Features You can configure the line key in the right bottom to be fixed as a switch page key. Then you can always use this key. It is especially useful for users who need to configure multi-page line keys.
  • Page 206 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The following shows the page icons: The following table lists the page icons to indicate different statuses: Phone Models Icons Description Fast-flashing: the BLF monitored user receives an incoming call on the non-current page.

  • Page 207: Page Tips For Expansion Module

    Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default phone_setting.page_tip 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the page icon and page switch key LED to indicate different states of line keys on the non-current page. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones.
  • Page 208 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The following table lists the page switch key LED to indicate different statuses: LED Status Description Off (non-configurable) Indicates non-current pages. Solid green (non-configurable) Indicates current page. The BLF monitored user receives an Flashing red incoming call on the non-current pages.

  • Page 209: Label Length

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the page switch key LED status on the expansion module when BLF monitored user receives an incoming call on the non-current pages. This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key. If it is left blank, the default value takes effect.
  • Page 210 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones SIP-T48G When label length feature is set to Extended: For SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones, the display length of the line key label is extended and the characters are displayed in one line.
  • Page 211 Configuring Basic Features When label length feature is set to Mid-range (not applicable to SIP-T48G IP phones): SIP-T46G Procedure Label length can be configured using the following methods. Configure label length. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.config_dsskey_length Configure label length. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p...

  • Page 212: Linekey Length In Short

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure the label length via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. Select Extended from the pull-down list of Label Length. Click Confirm to accept the change. Linekey Length in Short Linekey length in short allows IP phones to shorten the line key label when the phone places a call, receives a call, is during a call, or is idle (if large DND icon is enabled).
  • Page 213 Configuring Basic Features The following figure shows an example of label display when it is set to 2 chars: The following figure shows an example of label display when it is set to No Label: Procedure Linekey length in short can be configured using the following methods. Configure linekey length in short.

  • Page 214: Account Registration

    Account Registration Registering an account makes it easier for the IP phones to receive an incoming call or dial an outgoing call. Yealink IP phones support registering multiple accounts on a phone; each account requires an extension or phone number.
  • Page 215 Configuring Basic Features Phone Model Accounts SIP-T21(P) E2 <=2 SIP-T19(P) E2 The IP phones support SIP server redundancy for account registration. For more information, refer to Server Redundancy on page 650. If you want to customize multiple DSS keys to associate with an account, refer to Multiple Line Keys per Account on page 199.
  • Page 216 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure the interval for the IP phone to retry to register when registration fails. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=accou nt-adv&q=load&acc=0 Configure the SIP account registration Phone User Interface information. Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 217 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Accounts->Display Name String within 99 account.X.auth_name Blank characters Description: Configures the user name for register authentication for a specific account. Note: The user name for register authentication is provided by ITSP. It is always matched with a password (configured by the parameter “account.X.password”) used for register authentication, if required by the server.
  • Page 218 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the SIP server Y that accepts registrations for a specific account. Example: account.1.sip_server.1.address = 10.2.1.48 Web User Interface: Account->Register->SIP Server Y->Server Host...
  • Page 219 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the outbound proxy server Y for a specific account. Example: account.1.outbound_proxy.1.address = 10.1.8.11 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.outbound_proxy_enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 220 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None X is the account ID. For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-16; for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S, X=1-12; for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G, X=1-6; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3; for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2; for SIP-T19(P) E2, X=1.

  • Page 221: Multiple Line Keys Per Account

    Configuring Basic Features To configure the interval for re-register when registration fails via web user interface: Click Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Enter the desired interval in the SIP Registration Retry Timer(0~1800s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To register an account via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Accounts.
  • Page 222 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones you want to configure maximum number of concurrent calls per line key, refer to Multiple Call Appearances on page 206. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. The number of the DSS keys associated with an account must meet the following:...
  • Page 223 Configuring Basic Features a_new_linekey Configure whether to set up a conference call using a new line key on a phone basis. Parameter: phone_setting.call_appearance.conferenc e_via_new_linekey Configure the number of DSS keys to be assigned automatically. Parameter: account.X.number_of_linekey Configure the Auto Label feature. Parameters: account.X.auto_label.enable account.X.auto_label.rule...
  • Page 224 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values features.auto_linekeys.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the DSS keys to be assigned with Line type automatically. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: The number of the DSS keys is determined by the value of the parameter “account.X.number_of_linekey”.
  • Page 225 Configuring Basic Features 0-Disabled, the line keys labels are determined by the value of the parameter “account.X.label”. 1-Enabled, the line keys labels are determined by the custom label rule (configure by the parameter “accout.X.auto_label.rule”). Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.auto_linekeys.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 226 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones the current line key will be used. Note: The number of the line keys is determined by the value of the parameter “account.X.number_of_linekey”. The value configured by the parameter “account.X.phone_setting.call_appearance.transfer_via_new_linekey” takes precedence over that configured by this parameter.
  • Page 227 Configuring Basic Features X is the account ID. For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-16; for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S, X=1-12; for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G, X=1-6; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3; for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2; for SIP-T19(P) E2, X=1. Per-Line Parameters Global Parameters account.X.phone_setting.call_appearance.transfe phone_setting.call_appearance.transfer_via_new_ r_via_new_linekey linekey account.X.phone_setting.call_appearance.confer phone_setting.call_appearance.transfer_via_new_ ence_via_new_linekey linekey To configure auto linekeys feature via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.

  • Page 228: Multiple Call Appearances

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones This field appears only if Auto Linekeys is enabled. Click Confirm to accept the change. Multiple Call Appearances You can enable each registered line on the phone to support multiple concurrent calls. For example, you can place one call on hold, switch to another call on the same registered line, and have both calls display.

  • Page 229: Call Display

    Configuring Basic Features lls_per_linekey Details of Configuration Parameter: Permitted Parameter Default Values Integer from phone_setting.call_appearance.calls_per_linekey 0 to 24 Description: Configures the maximum number of concurrent calls per line key for the IP phone. It applies to all registered lines. If it is set to 0, there is no limit for the number of concurrent calls. Example: phone_setting.call_appearance.calls_per_linekey = 2 It means that you can have up to two concurrent calls per line key on the IP phone.
  • Page 230 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The following figure shows an example of screen display when Display Called Party Information feature is enabled on the phone (a call from Tom (phone number: 1008) to Marry (phone number: 1009)).
  • Page 231 Configuring Basic Features Parameter: phone_setting.called_party_info_display. enable Specify the call information display method. Parameter: phone_setting.call_info_display_method Specify the horizontal scroll speed of caller information. Parameter: phone_setting.incoming_call.horizontal_ roll_interval Configure display contact photo feature. Configure display called party information feature. Specify the call information display Web User Interface method.
  • Page 232 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the called party information when receiving an incoming call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: The information display method is configured by the parameter “phone_setting.call_info_display_method”.

  • Page 233: Display Method On Dialing

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None To configure call display features via web user interface: Click on Settings->Call Display. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Contact Photo. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Called Party Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Information Display Method.
  • Page 234 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones SIP-T27G You can customize the account information to be displayed on the IP phone as required. IP phones support three account information display methods: Label, Display Name or User Name.

  • Page 235: Time And Date

    DD MMM YYYY 02 Sep, 2016 WWW DD MMM Fri, 02 Sep Yealink IP phones also support customizing date format. For example, YYYY-MMM-DDD-WWW, and W,MD, and so on. For more information, refer to Time and Date Settings on page 219.

  • Page 236: Ntp Time Server

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The following table lists available configuration methods for time and date. Option Configuration Methods Configuration Files NTP time server Web User Interface Phone User Interface Configuration Files Time Zone Web User Interface...
  • Page 237 Configuring Basic Features Procedure NTP time server and time zone can be configured using the following methods. Configure NTP by DHCP priority feature and DHCP time feature. Parameters: local_time.manual_ntp_srv_prior local_time.dhcp_time Configure the NTP server, time zone. Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameters: (Configuration File) local_time.ntp_server1 local_time.ntp_server2...
  • Page 238 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.dhcp_time 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to update time with the offset time offered by the DHCP server. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only available to offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
  • Page 239 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.interval Integer from 15 to 86400 1000 Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) to update time and date from the NTP server. Example: local_time.interval = 1000 Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Update Interval (15~86400s) Phone User Interface: None local_time.time_zone...
  • Page 240 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->SNTP Settings->Location To configure NTP by DHCP priority feature via web user interface: Click on Settings->Time & Date. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of NTP by DHCP Priority.

  • Page 241: Time And Date Settings

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired time interval in the Update Interval (15~86400s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the NTP server and time zone via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->SNTP Settings. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the time zone that applies to your area from the Time Zone field.
  • Page 242 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones You need to know the following rules when customizing date formats: Format Description It represents a two-digit year. Y/YY For example, 16, 17, 18… It represents a four-digit year. Y is used more than twice (for example, YYY, YYYY) For example, 2016, 2017, 2018…...
  • Page 243 Configuring Basic Features Configure the time and date manually. Configure the time and date formats. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-datetime&q=load Configure the time and date manually. Phone User Interface Configure the time and date formats. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default...
  • Page 244 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the date format. 0-WWW MMM DD 1-DD-MMM-YY 2-YYYY-MM-DD 3-DD/MM/YYYY 4-MM/DD/YY 5-DD MMM YYYY 6-WWW DD MMM Note: “WWW” represents the abbreviation of the week, “DD” represents a two-digit day, “MMM”...
  • Page 245 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default represents a two-digit day, “W”/“WW” represents the abbreviation of the day of week, three or more three “W” letters (for example, WWW) represent the long format of the day of week. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None...

  • Page 246: Daylight Saving Time (Dst)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Date Format. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the time and date manually via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Time & Date->General->Manual Settings.
  • Page 247 Configuring Basic Features Procedure DST can be configured using the following methods. Configure DST. Parameters: local_time.summer_time Central Provisioning local_time.dst_time_type <MAC>.cfg (Configuration File) local_time.start_time local_time.end_time local_time.offset_time Configure DST. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=setting s-datetime&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.summer_time 0, 1 or 2...
  • Page 248 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Fixed Type Phone User Interface: None Refer to the following local_time.start_time 1/1/0 content Description: Configures the starting time of the Daylight Saving Time (DST).
  • Page 249 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Value formats are: Month/Day/Hour (for DST by Date)  Month/Week of Month/Day of Week/Hour of Day (for DST by Week)  If “local_time.dst_time_type” is set to 0 (DST by Date), use the mapping: Month: 1=January, 2=February,…, 12=December Day: 1=the first day in a month,…, 31= the last day in a month Hour: 0=0am, 1=1am,…, 23=11pm...
  • Page 250 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired time zone from the pull-down list of Time Zone. Enter the domain name or IP address in the Primary Server and Secondary Server field respectively. Enter the desired time interval in the Update Interval (15~86400s) field.
  • Page 251 AutoDST file if required. The AutoDST file allows you to add or modify time zone and DST settings for your area each year. Before customizing, you need to obtain the AutoDST file. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for DST template. You can also obtain the DST template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 252 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Add or modify time zone and DST settings between <DSTData> and </DSTData>.  The display order of time zone is corresponding to the szTime order specified in the  AutoDST.xml file.

  • Page 253: Language

    Configuring Basic Features Procedure The access URL of the AutoDST file can be specified using the configuration file. Specify the access URL of the AutoDST file. Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) auto_dst.url Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default auto_dst.url URL within 511 characters...

  • Page 254: Loading Language Packs

    IP phone. Language packs can only be loaded using configuration file. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for language packs. You can also obtain the language packs online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 255 Configuring Basic Features Customizing a Language for Phone User Interface The following table lists the available languages and associated language packs for the phone user interface: Associated Language Pack Available Language English 000.GUI.English.lang Chinese Simplified 001.GUI.Chinese_S.lang Chinese Traditional 002.GUI.Chinese_T.lang French (Canada) 003.GUI.French_CA.lang French (EU) 004.GUI.French.lang...
  • Page 256 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The following shows a portion of the language pack “000.GUI.English.lang” for the phone user interface (take SIP-T46G IP phones for example): Save the language file and place it to the provisioning server (for example, 192.168.10.25).
  • Page 257 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default gui_lang.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom LCD language pack for the phone user interface. Example: gui_lang.url = http://192.168.10.25/000.GUI.English.lang During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the HTTP provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the language pack “000.GUI.English.lang”.
  • Page 258 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Customizing a Language for Web User Interface The following table lists available languages and associated language packs for the web user interface: Associated Note Available Language Associated Language Pack Language Pack English 1.English.js...
  • Page 259 Configuring Basic Features The following shows a portion of the language pack “1.English.js” for the web user interface (take SIP-T46G IP phones for example): Save the language file and place it to the provisioning server (for example, 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the web user interface language pack in the configuration file. You can also customize the translation of the note language pack.
  • Page 260 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Save the language file and place it to the provisioning server (for example, 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the note language pack of the web user interface. If you want to add a new language (for example, Wuilan) to IP phones, prepare the language file named as “12.Wuilan.js”...
  • Page 261 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default wui_lang.url = http://192.168.10.25/11.Russian.js Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None URL within 511 characters Blank wui_lang_note.url Description: Configures the access URL of the custom note language pack for web user interface. Example: wui_lang_note.url = http://192.168.10.25/1.English_note.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the HTTP provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the note language pack “1.English_note.xml”.

  • Page 262: Specifying The Language To Use

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Specifying the Language to Use The default language used on the phone user interface is English. If the language of your web browser is not supported by the IP phone, the web user interface will use English by default.
  • Page 263 If you want to use the custom language (for example, Guilan) for the IP phone, configure the parameter “static.lang.gui = Guilan”. Note: For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP phones, they do not support Chinese by default. For more information, contact Yealink FAE. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Language...

  • Page 264: Input Method

    If you just want to customize the input method for a certain language, the filename must be formatted as “language name_ime.txt” (for example, German_ime.txt). You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for keypad input method file. You can also obtain the keypad input method file online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 265 Configuring Basic Features The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file “ime.txt”: The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file “Hebrew_ime.txt”:...
  • Page 266 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file “Russian_ime.txt”: To customize a keypad input method file: Open the desired keypad input method file (for example, ime.txt) using an ASCII editor.
  • Page 267 Configuring Basic Features Save the keypad input method file and place it to the provisioning server (for example, 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the custom keypad input method file in the configuration file. When adding new characters for the existing input method, ensure that the added characters are Note supported by IP phones.

  • Page 268: Specifying The Default Input Method

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None http://localhost/all or gui_input_method.delete Blank Name.txt http://localhost/ Description: Delete the specified or all custom keypad input method files of the phone user interface.

  • Page 269: Logo Customization

    Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default directory.edit_default_input_method Abc, 2aB, 123, abc or ABC Description: Configures the default input method when the user edits contacts in the Local Directory, LDAP, Remote Phone Book or Blacklist. Example: directory.edit_default_input_method = abc Web User Interface: None...

  • Page 270: Customizing A Logo Template File

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones In this example, a system logo (Yealink logo) is displayed on the image logo screen: Logo is not applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. The following table lists the supported logo file format and resolution for each phone model.

  • Page 271: Configuring The Logo Shown On The Idle Screen

    Configuring Basic Features To customize a dob formatted logo file using the PictureExDemo tool: Double click the PictureExDemo.exe. Click Add button to open a *.bmp file. You can repeat the second step to add multiple original picture files. Click the Convert button. Then you can find the DOB logo files in the adv directory.
  • Page 272 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Specify the access URL of the custom logo file. Parameter: lcd_logo.url Delete all custom logo files. Parameter: lcd_logo.delete Configure the logo shown on the idle screen. Upload the custom logo file.
  • Page 273 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the custom logo file “logo.dob”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.lcd_logo.mode” is set to 2 (Custom Logo). It is not applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Upload Logo Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 274: Softkey Layout

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones If you select Custom logo, you can click Browse to select the logo file from your local system, and then click Upload to upload the file. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 275: Customizing Softkey Layout Template File

    The softkey layout template allows you to customize soft key layout for different call states. The call states include CallFailed, CallIn, Connecting, Dialing (not applicable to SIP-T48G/S), RingBack and Talking. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for softkey layout template. You can also obtain the softkey layout template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more...
  • Page 276 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys Retrieve Empty Empty Empty RingBack Empty Switch End Call RingBack Transfer SemiAttendTrans Empty Empty Back (Transfer Empty Switch Ring Back) End Call...
  • Page 277 Configuring Basic Features Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys Empty Switch Empty Answer Hold Reject Conferenced Split Mute End Call Manage (not applicable to SIP-T48G/S IP phones) RTP Status When editing a softkey layout template, learn the following: <Call States>...
  • Page 278 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones For each soft key that you want to enable, move the string from the disabled soft key list to enabled soft key list in the file. For each soft key that you want to disabled, just move the string from the enabled soft key list to disabled soft key list.
  • Page 279 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Specify the access URL of the softkey layout template using the configuration file. Configure the softkey layout. Parameter: phone_setting.custom_softkey_enabl Specify the access URL of the softkey layout template. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameters: (Configuration File) custom_softkey_call_failed.url custom_softkey_call_in.url custom_softkey_connecting.url custom_softkey_dialing.url custom_softkey_ring_back.url...
  • Page 280 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the Call Failed state. Example: custom_softkey_call_failed.url = http:// 192.168.1.20/XMLfiles/CallFailed.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the CallFailed.xml file from the “XMLfiles”...
  • Page 281 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.custom_softkey_enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None custom_softkey_dialing.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the Dialing state.
  • Page 282 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default custom_softkey_talking.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the Talking state.

  • Page 283: Key As Send

    Configuring Basic Features The LCD screen displays the soft keys in the adjusted order. Click Confirm to accept the change. Key As Send Key as send allows assigning the pound key (“#”) or asterisk key (“*”) as the send key. Procedure Key as send can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 284 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.key_as_send 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the "#" or "*" key as the send key. 0-Disabled, neither “#” nor “*” can be used as the send key.

  • Page 285: Send Tone

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Key As Send. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a send key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Others->General->Key As Send. Press , or the Switch soft key to select # or * from the Key As Send field, or select Disabled to disable this feature.

  • Page 286: Key Tone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a key tone when a user presses a send key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.key_tone” is set to 1 (Enabled).

  • Page 287: Dial Plan

    Configuring Basic Features Configure a key tone. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.key_tone 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a key tone when a user presses any key on your phone keypad.

  • Page 288: Dial Plan Using Xml Template Files

    “match” (specify and recognize) strings of text, such as particular characters, words, or patterns of characters. Yealink IP phones support two methods to help creating a dial plan: Dial Plan using XML...

  • Page 289: Replace Rule

    Configuring Basic Features instance, to logically combine two or more patterns. Example: "([1-9])([2-7])3" would match “923”, “153”, “673”, and so on. The “$” followed by the sequence number of a parenthesis means the characters placed in the parenthesis. The sequence number stands for the corresponding parenthesis.
  • Page 290 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: dialplan.replace.prefix.1 = 1 Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “dialplan.digitmap.enable” and “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” are set to 0 (Disabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Dial Plan->Replace Rule->Prefix...
  • Page 291 Customizing Replace Rule Template File The replace rule template helps with the creation of multiple replace rules. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for replace rule template. You can also obtain the replace rule template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more...
  • Page 292 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones When editing a replace rule template file, learn the following: <DialRule> indicates the start of the template file and </DialRule> indicates the end of the  template file. When specifying the desired line(s) to apply the replace rule, the valid values are 0 and line ...

  • Page 293: Dial Now

    Configuring Basic Features If you want to change the replace rule, specify the values within double quotes. Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the replace rule template in the configuration file. Procedure Specify the access URL of the replace rule template using the configuration file.
  • Page 294 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Dial now rule can be created using the following methods. Create the dial now rule for the IP phone. Parameters: dialplan.dialnow.rule.X Central Provisioning dialplan.dialnow.line_id.X <y0000000000xx>.cfg (Configuration File) Configure the delay time for the dial now rule.
  • Page 295 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None dialplan.dialnow.line_id.X Blank (for Refer to the following content all lines) (X ranges from 1 to 100) Description: Configures the desired line to apply the dial now rule. The digit 0 stands for all lines. If it is left blank, the dial now rule will apply to all lines on the IP phone.
  • Page 296 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To create a dial now rule via web user interface: Click on Settings->Dial Plan->Dial Now. Enter the desired value in the Rule field. Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank.
  • Page 297 The dial now template helps with the creation of multiple dial now rules. After setup, place the dial now template to the provisioning server and specify the access URL in the configuration file. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for dial now template. You can also obtain the dial now template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 298 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones LineID="" specifies the desired line(s) for this rule. When you leave it blank or enter 0, this dial now rule will apply to all lines. If you want to change the dial now rule, specify the values within double quotes.

  • Page 299: Area Code

    Configuring Basic Features Area Code Area codes are also known as Numbering Plan Areas (NPAs). They usually indicate geographical areas in one country. When entered numbers match the predefined area code rule, the IP phone will automatically add the area code before the numbers when dialing out them. IP phones only support one area code rule.
  • Page 300 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None dialplan.area_code.min_len Integer from 1 to 15 Description: Configures the minimum length of the entered numbers. Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “dialplan.digitmap.enable” and “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable”...

  • Page 301: Block Out

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan.area_code.line_id = 1 Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by commas. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. It works only if the values of the parameters “dialplan.digitmap.enable” and “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” are set to 0 (Disabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Dial Plan->Area Code->Account Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 302 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones dialplan.block_out.line_id.X Create the block out rule for the IP phone. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-blackout&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan.block_out.number.X String within 32 characters...

  • Page 303: Dial Plan Using Digit Map String Rules

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default phones. It works only if the values of the parameters “dialplan.digitmap.enable” and “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable” are set to 0 (Disabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Dial Plan->Block Out->Account Phone User Interface: None To create a block out rule via web user interface: Click on Settings->Dial Plan->Block Out.
  • Page 304 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones a complete match occurs when waiting x seconds after inputting 123. The “x” can be used as a placeholder for any digit from 0 to 9. Example: “12x” would match “121”, “122”, “123”, and so on.
  • Page 305 Configuring Basic Features The comma “,” can be used as a separator to generate secondary dial tone. Example: “<9,:55>xx”, after entering digit “9”, secondary dial tone plays and you can complete the remaining two-digit number. Note: The secondary dial tone can be customized. For more information, refer to Tones on page 726.
  • Page 306 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones account.X.dialplan.digitmap.no_match_action account.X.dialplan.digitmap.active.on_hook_d ialing account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.on_hook _dial account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.director y_dial account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.history_ dial account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.forward account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.press_se Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values dialplan.digitmap.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the digit map feature for the IP phone.
  • Page 307 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Configures digit map pattern used for the dial plan. Example: dialplan.digitmap.string = <[2-9]x:86>3.T|0x.!|1xxx Note: The string must be compatible with the digit map feature of MGCP described in 2.1.5 3435. It works only if the value of the parameter “dialplan.digitmap.enable” or “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable”...
  • Page 308 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values None Phone User Interface: None Refer to dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_short_timer following content Description: Configures the timeout interval (in seconds) for any string of digit map. The IP phone will wait this many seconds before matching the entered digits to the dial plan and placing the call.
  • Page 309 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values dialplan.digitmap.no_match_action 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the behavior when an impossible digit map match occurs. 0-prevent users from entering a number and immediately dial out the entered numbers 1-the dialing will fail and the LCD screen will prompt “Forbidden Number” 2-allow users to accumulate digits and dispatch call manually with the send key or automatically dial out the entered number after a certain period of time configured by the parameter “dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_long_timer”...
  • Page 310 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values after pressing a send key when dialing on-hook or pressing the DSS key (for example, speed dial, BLF or prefix DSS key). 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “dialplan.digitmap.enable” or “account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable”...
  • Page 311 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values configured by this parameter. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.forward 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the digit map to be applied to the numbers that you want to forward to when performing call forward.

  • Page 312: Emergency Dialplan

    Per-Line Parameters Global Parameters account.X.dialplan.digitmap.enable dialplan.digitmap.enable account.X.dialplan.digitmap.string dialplan.digitmap.string account.X.dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_long_timer dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_long_timer account.X.dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_short_timer dialplan.digitmap.interdigit_short_timer account.X.dialplan.digitmap.no_match_action dialplan.digitmap.no_match_action account.X.dialplan.digitmap.active.on_hook_dialing dialplan.digitmap.active.on_hook_dialing account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.on_hook_dial dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.on_hook_dial account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.directory_dial dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.directory_dial account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.history_dial dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.history_dial account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.forward dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.forward account.X.dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.press_send dialplan.digitmap.apply_to.press_send Emergency Dialplan Yealink IP phones support dialing emergency telephone numbers when the phone is locked...

  • Page 313: Emergency Dial Plan

    Configuring Basic Features (refer to Phone Lock). Due to the fact that the IP phone must have a registered account or a configured SIP server, it may not meet the need of dialing emergency telephone number at any time. Emergency dialplan allows users to dial the emergency telephone number (emergency services number) at any time when the IP phone is powered on and has been connected to the network.
  • Page 314 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Emergency dialplan can be configured using the configuration file. Configure the emergency dialplan. Parameters: dialplan.emergency.asserted_id_source Central dialplan.emergency.custom_asserted_id Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.c dialplan.emergency.server.X.address (Configuration dialplan.emergency.server.X.port File) dialplan.emergency.server.X.transport_type dialplan.emergency.X.value dialplan.emergency.X.server_priority Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 315 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the custom outbound identity when placing an emergency call. If using a TEL URI, for example, tel:+16045558000. The full URI is included in the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header (for example, <tel:+16045558000>). If using a SIP URI, for example, sip:1234567890123@abc.com. The full URI is included in the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header and the address will be replaced by the emergency server (for example, <sip:1234567890123@emergency.com>).
  • Page 316 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan.emergency.server.X.transport_type 0, 1, 2 or 3 (X ranges from 1 to 3) Description: Configures the transport method the IP phone uses to communicate with the emergency server X.

  • Page 317: Hotline

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The IP phone tries to send the INVITE request to each emergency server for three times. Example: dialplan.emergency.1.server_priority = 2, 1, 3 It means the IP phone sends the INVITE request to the emergency server 2 first. If the emergency server 2 does not respond correctly to the INVITE, then tries to make the call using the emergency server 1.
  • Page 318 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure the hotline number. Specify the time the IP phone waits before automatically dialing out the hotline number. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Configure the hotline number. Specify the time the IP phone waits...

  • Page 319: Off Hook Hot Line Dialing

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: Line key is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Hotline Delay(0~10s) Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Others->Hot Line->Hotline Delay To configure hotline via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Enter the hotline number in the Hotline Number field.
  • Page 320 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones from a SIP server. Off hook hot line dialing feature limits the call-out permission of this account and disables the Note hotline feature. For example, when the phone goes off hook using the account with this feature enabled, the configured hotline number will not be dialed out automatically.

  • Page 321: Directory List

    Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on page 519. Customizing a Directory Template File You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for directory template. You can also obtain the directory template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more information on obtaining the directory template, refer to...
  • Page 322 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Element Attribute Description remotedirectory Note: Do not edit this field. ldap broadsoftdirectory plcmdirectory gabdirectory pabdirectory metaswitchcontacts metaswitchcalllog uc_buddies Local Directory History The display name of the Network CallLog directory list.
  • Page 323 Configuring Basic Features <item id_name="localdirectory" display_name="Local Directory" priority="1" enable="1" dev="common"/> Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server (for example, 192.168.1.20). Specify the access URL of the custom directory template file in the configuration files (for example, static.directory_setting.url = http://192.168.1.20/favorite_setting.xml). Procedure Directory can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 324: Search Source List In Dialing

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default None To configure the directory via web user interface: Click on Directory->Setting. In the Directory block, select the desired list from the Disabled column and then click The selected list appears in the Enabled column.

  • Page 325: Customizing A Super Search Template File

    Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) on page 519. Customizing a Super Search Template File You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for super search template. You can also obtain the super search template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. For more information on obtaining the super search template, refer to...
  • Page 326 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Element Attribute Description 0/1, Enable or disable the IP 0: Disabled phone to search the desired enable 1: Enabled directory list. T19 T21 T23 T40 T27 T27G T29 T41 The applicable phone models T42 T42S T41S T46 T46S T48 T48S of the directory list.
  • Page 327 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default super_search.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the super search template file. Example: super_search.url = http://192.168.1.20/super_search.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the super search template file “super_search.xml”.

  • Page 328: Call Log

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The LCD screen displays the search results in the adjusted order. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Log Save Call Log IP phones record and maintain phone events to a call log, also known as a call list. The call log contains call information such as remote party identification, time and date of the call, and call duration.
  • Page 329 Configuring Basic Features Configure call log feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Configure call log feature. Phone User Interface Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.save_call_history 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to save the call log. 0-Disabled, the IP phone cannot log the missed calls, placed calls, received calls and forwarded calls in the call log lists.

  • Page 330: Backing Up The Call Logs

    Backing up the Call Logs Yealink IP phones support storing all call logs to a call log file named <MAC>-calllog.xml. You can back up this file to the server, avoiding data loss. Once the call logs update, the IP phone will automatically upload this file to the provisioning server or a specific server.
  • Page 331 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Backing up the call log file can be configured using the configuration file. Configure the IP phone to back up the call log. Parameters: static.auto_provision.local_calllog.ba ckup.enable Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg static.auto_provision.local_calllog.ba (Configuration File) ckup.path static.auto_provision.local_calllog.wri te_delay.terminated static.auto_provision.custom.upload_ method Details of the Configuration Parameters: Permitted...
  • Page 332 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values uploads/downloads the contact file “<MAC>-calllog.xml”. Example: static.auto_provision.local_calllog.backup.path = http://192.168.1.20/calllog Once the call logs update, the IP phone will upload the call log file to the specified path “http://192.168.1.20/calllog”.

  • Page 333: Call List Show Number

    Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None Call List Show Number Call list show number allows the IP phone to show the phone number instead of the name in the call log list. To use this feature, make sure the save call log feature is enabled. For more information on save call log, refer to Save Call Log on page 306.

  • Page 334: Missed Call Log

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure call list show number via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call List Show Number. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 335 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Missed call log can be configured using the following methods. Configure missed call log feature for the SIP account. Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) account.X.missed_calllog Configure missed call log feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=acco unt-basic&q=load&acc=0 Details of the Configuration Parameters:...

  • Page 336: Local Directory

    Contacts and groups can be added either one by one or in batch using a local contact file. Yealink IP phones support both *.xml and *.csv format contact files, but you can only customize the *.xml format contact file.

  • Page 337: Customizing A Local Contact File

    The existing local contacts on the IP phones will be overridden by the downloaded local contacts. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for local contact template. You can also obtain the local contact template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 338 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Element Values Description this element for each phone model, refer to to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. the following table. Format of the value: System ring tone: Auto An element of contact.
  • Page 339 Configuring Basic Features Configuration Parameters The following table lists the configuration parameters used when customizing a local contact file: Parameters Permitted Values Default local_contact.data.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the local contact file (*.xml). Example: local_contact.data.url = http://192.168.10.25/contact.xml Note: If the value of the parameter "static.auto_provision.local_contact.backup.enable"...
  • Page 340 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The contact icon file should be uploaded to the provisioning server in advance. Example: local_contact.icon_image.url = tftp://192.168.10.25/Photo.jpg Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T48G/S IP phones.
  • Page 341 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None local_contact.icon.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of a TAR contact icon file. The format of the contact icon must be *.png, *.jpg, *.bmp or *.jpeg. The contact icon file should be compressed as a TAR file in advance and then place it to the provisioning server.
  • Page 342 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired ring tone from the pull-down list of Ring. Click Add to add the group. To add a contact to the local directory via web user interface: Click on Directory->Local Directory.
  • Page 343 Configuring Basic Features If Auto is selected, the IP phone will use the default account when placing calls to the contact from the local directory. Click Add to add the contact. To add a group to the local directory via phone user interface: Press Menu->Directory->Local Directory.
  • Page 344 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Click Browse to locate a contact list file (the file format must be *.xml) from your local system. Click Import XML to import the contact list. The web user interface prompts "The original contact will be covered, continue?".
  • Page 345 Configuring Basic Features At least one item should be selected to be imported into the local directory. Click Import to complete importing the contact list. To export a contact list via web user interface: Click on Directory->Local Directory. Click Export XML (or Export CSV). Click Save to save the contact list to your local system.
  • Page 346 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones For each group that you want to add, add the following string to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <group display_name="" ring=""/> For each contact that you want to add, add the following string to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <contact display_name=""...
  • Page 347 Configuring Basic Features To customize a local contact file: Open the template file using an ASCII editor. For each group that you want to add, add the following string to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <group display_name="" ring=""/> For each contact that you want to add, add the following string to the file.
  • Page 348 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones provisioning server in advance. In addition, you can also compress all the avatars as a tar formatted file, and then upload the tar formatted file to the provisioning server. Preparing the Tar Formatted File You can package the tar formatted file using the tool 7-Zip or GnuWin32.
  • Page 349 Configuring Basic Features Select tar from the pull-down list of Archive format. Click the OK button. A photo.tar file is generated in the directory C:\Program Files\photo. Place this file to the provisioning server (for example, 192.168.10.25). Customizing a Local Contact File To customize a local contact file: Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
  • Page 350 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones other_number="1112" line="1,2" ring="Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Config:cutom1.jpg"/> <contact display_name="Tom" office_number="2020" mobile_number="2021" other_number="2112" line="2" ring="Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Config:cutom2.png"/> Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the custom local contact template in the configuration file.
  • Page 351 Configuring Basic Features During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the file “Contact.tar”. Note that if you are using method 3 to specify custom avatar for contacts, the name of the avatars Note TAR file must be photo.tar (case-sensitive), and the name of the contact XML file must be ContactData.xml (case-sensitive).
  • Page 352 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones <contact display_name="" office_number="" mobile_number="" other_number="" line="" ring="" group_id_name="" default_photo=""/> Specify the values within double quotes. For example: <group display_name="Friend" ring="Splash.wav"/> <contact display_name="Lily" office_number="1020" mobile_number="1021" other_number="1112" line="1,2" ring="Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Config:cutom1.jpg"/> <contact display_name="Tom" office_number="2020" mobile_number="2021"...
  • Page 353 Configuring Basic Features During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the avatar file “photo1.tar”, icon file “photo2.tar” and the local contact file “contact.xml”. If you have configured to back up the local contacts to the server, the IP phone will download the Note contact file “<MAC>-contact.xml”...

  • Page 354: Backing Up The Local Contacts

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Backing up the Local Contacts Yealink IP phones support storing all local contacts to a contact file named <MAC>-contact.xml. You can back up this file to the server, avoiding data loss. Once the contacts update, the IP phone will automatically upload this file to the provisioning server or a specific server.
  • Page 355 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values contacts update; and downloads the contacts in the “<MAC>-contact.xml” according to its MAC address from the specific path during auto provisioning. Note: It does not affect the downloading of the contact avatar/icon files. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 356: Live Dialpad

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values None Phone User Interface: None Live Dialpad Live dialpad allows IP phones to automatically dial out the entered phone number without pressing the send key after a designated period of time.

  • Page 357: Speed Dial

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the delay time (in seconds) for the IP phone to automatically dial out the entered phone number without pressing a send key. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.predial_autodial” is set to 1 (Enabled) and the value of the parameter “dialplan.digitmap.enable”...
  • Page 358 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones expansion_module.X.key.Y.line linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label linekey.X.shortlabel Assign a speed dial DSS key. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0 Assign a speed dial DSS key. Phone User Interface...
  • Page 359 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Description: Configures the desired line to apply the speed dial DSS key. Permitted Values: 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) 1-Line 1 2-Line 2...
  • Page 360 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. Note: EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key/Ext Key->Label...

  • Page 361: Call Waiting

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a speed dial DSS key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Speed Dial from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account ID field.
  • Page 362 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters: call_waiting.enable call_waiting.tone call_waiting.on_code call_waiting.off_code Configure call waiting. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Web User Interface Configure call waiting tone. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-audio&q=load Configure call waiting and call Phone User Interface waiting tone.
  • Page 363 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default incoming call during a call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “call_waiting.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It works only if the value of the parameter “features.ignore_incoming_call.enable” is set to 0 (Disabled).

  • Page 364: Auto Redial

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure call waiting via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Waiting. (Optional.) Enter the call waiting on code in the Call Waiting On Code field.
  • Page 365 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Auto redial can be configured using the following methods. Configure auto redial feature. Parameters: Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg auto_redial.enable (Configuration File) auto_redial.interval auto_redial.times Configure auto redial feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Configure auto redial feature. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters...
  • Page 366 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->Others->Auto Redial->Redial Interval auto_redial.times Integer from 1 to 300 Description: Configures the auto redial times when the callee is temporarily unavailable. The IP phone tries to redial the dialed number as many times as configured till the callee answers the call.

  • Page 367: Auto Answer

    Configuring Basic Features Auto Answer Auto answer allows IP phones to automatically answer an incoming call. By default, the IP phones will not automatically answer the incoming call during a call or while dialing even if auto answer is enabled; and the incoming call will not be automatically answered after you end the current call or cancel the dialing.
  • Page 368 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure auto answer and auto answer mute. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=accoun t-basic&q=load&acc=0 Web User Interface Specify a period of delay time for auto answer. Configure auto answer tone. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>servlet?p=features -general&q=load...
  • Page 369 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default have to manually pick up the incoming call. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.auto_answer” or “features.ip_call.auto_answer.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None features.auto_answer_delay Integer from 1 to 4...
  • Page 370 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, the IP phone will mute the microphone when an incoming call is automatically answered, and then the other party cannot hear you. Note: It works only if the values of parameters “account.X.auto_answer” and “features.allow_mute”...
  • Page 371 Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired time in the Auto Answer Delay(1~4s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure auto answer tone via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Enable Auto Answer Tone. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 372: Ip Direct Auto Answer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Press the Save soft key to accept the change. IP Direct Auto Answer IP direct auto answer allows IP phones to automatically answer an IP call. IP direct auto answer works only if allow IP call is enabled.

  • Page 373: Allow Ip Call

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of IP Direct Auto Answer. Click Confirm to accept the change. Allow IP Call Allow IP Call feature allows IP phones to receive or place an IP call. You can neither receive nor place an IP call if allow IP call feature is disabled.

  • Page 374: Accept Sip Trust Server Only

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you want to receive an IP call, make sure the value of the parameter “sip.trust_ctrl” is set to 0 (Disabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Allow IP Call...
  • Page 375 Configuring Basic Features (Configuration File) Parameter: sip.trust_ctrl Configure accept SIP trust server only. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=fe atures-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default sip.trust_ctrl 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to only accept the SIP message from the SIP server and outbound proxy server.

  • Page 376: Call Completion

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Completion Call completion allows users to monitor the busy party and establish a call when the busy party becomes available to receive a call. Two factors commonly prevent a call from connecting...
  • Page 377 NOTIFY sip:10111@10.10.20.32:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.10.20.31:5060;branch=z9hG4bK3431394016 From: <sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=1558968605 To: "10111" <sip:10111@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=140677866 Call-ID: 0_2584152566@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 5 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:1000@10.10.20.31:5060> Content-Type: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.82.0.20 Subscription-State: active;expires=48 Event: dialog Content-Length: <?xml version="1.0"?> <dialog-info xmlns="urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:dialog-info" version="4" state="partial" entity="sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060"> <dialog id="65644"> <state>terminated</state>...
  • Page 378 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones </dialog-info> Procedure Call completion can be configured using the following methods. Configure call completion. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.call_completion_enable Configure call completion. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load...

  • Page 379: Anonymous Call

    Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.14:5060;branch=z9hG4bK3074920774 From: "Anonymous" <sip:anonymous@anonymous.invalid>;tag=131654239 To: <sip:1006@10.2.1.48:5060> Call-ID: 0_288363101@10.3.20.14 CSeq: 1 INVITE Contact: <sip:1009@10.3.20.14:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.82.0.20 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync...
  • Page 380 The anonymous call on code and anonymous call off code configured on IP phones are used to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call feature. They may vary on different servers. Yealink IP phones running firmware version 82 or later support a new Anonymous Call mechanism. The following only describe how to configure the new Anonymous Call mechanism.
  • Page 381 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->Anonymous->Line X->Anonymous (the value of the parameter “account.X.anonymous_call.server_base_only” must not be left blank) account.X.anonymous_call.server_base_only 0 or 1 Blank Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to perform the anonymous call feature on server-side only. 0-Disabled, the IP phone will perform the anonymous call feature on server-side and local.
  • Page 382 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the anonymous call off code for a specific account. The IP phone will send the code to deactivate anonymous call feature on server-side when you deactivate it on the IP phone.

  • Page 383: Anonymous Call Rejection

    They may vary on different servers. Yealink IP phones running firmware version 82 or later support a new Anonymous Call Rejection mechanism. The following only describe how to configure the new Anonymous Call Rejection mechanism.
  • Page 384 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.reject_anonymous_call 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the anonymous call rejection feature to on or off for a specific account. 0-Off 1-On, the IP phone will automatically reject incoming calls from users enabled anonymous call feature.

  • Page 385: Do Not Disturb (Dnd)

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default account.1.anonymous_reject_offcode = *75 Web User Interface: None (the value of the parameter “account.X.anonymous_call.server_base_only” must not be left blank) Phone User Interface: None (the value of the parameter “account.X.anonymous_call.server_base_only” must not be left blank) X is the account ID.
  • Page 386 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones depending on the DND mode. There are two DND modes: Phone (default): DND feature is effective for the phone system. You can apply DND to all  line registrations on the phone.
  • Page 387 Configuring Basic Features If the DND is activated in phone mode, the DND status changed on local will be synchronized to all registered accounts on server; but if the DND status of specific account is changed on server, the DND status on local will be changed. Procedure DND can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 388 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Specify the return code and the reason of the SIP response message when DND is activated. Parameter: features.dnd_refuse_code Configure large DND icon feature. Parameter: features.dnd.large_icon.enable Assign a DND DSS key.
  • Page 389 Configuring Basic Features Assign a DND DSS key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= dsskey&q=load&model=0 Configure DND. Phone User Interface Assign a DND DSS key. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.dnd.allow 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the DND feature. 0-Disabled, DND cannot be activated and users are not allowed to configure DND on the phone.
  • Page 390 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones notifies the phone of synchronizing the status. Conversely, if the user changes the DND feature status on the phone, the IP phone notifies the server of synchronizing the status. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.feature_key_sync.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 391 Configuring Basic Features Description: Triggers DND feature to on or off. 0-Off 1-On, the IP phone will reject incoming calls on all accounts. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) and value of the parameter “features.dnd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone) (except SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones).
  • Page 392 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->DND->Off Code Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DND->Off Code account.X.dnd.enable 0 or 1 Description: Triggers DND feature to on or off for a specific account. 0-Off 1-On, the IP phone will reject incoming calls on account X.
  • Page 393 Configuring Basic Features Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) and value of the parameter “features.dnd_mode” is set to 1 (Custom). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->AccountX->On Code Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DND->AccountX->On Code...
  • Page 394 486-Busy Here, the caller’s phone LCD screen will display the reason “Busy Here” when the callee enables DND. 603-Decline Note: For Yealink IP phones, it works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Return Code When DND...
  • Page 395 Configuring Basic Features is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None X is the account ID. For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-16; for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S, X=1-12; for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G, X=1-6; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3; for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2; for SIP-T19(P) E2, X=1. DND DSS Key DND DSS key can be configured only if the DND feature is enabled.
  • Page 396 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 characters (X ranges from 1 to 21) Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key.
  • Page 397 Configuring Basic Features (Optional.) Enter the DND on code in the On Code field. (Optional.) Enter the DND off code in the Off Code field. If you mark the Custom radio box: Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Mark the desired radio box in the DND Status field.
  • Page 398 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the DND off code in the Off Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To specify the authorized numbers when DND is activated via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.
  • Page 399 Configuring Basic Features Multiple numbers are separated by commas. Click Confirm to accept the change. To specify the return code and the reason when DND is activated via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Return Code When DND. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 400: Busy Tone Delay

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select DND from the Key Type field.
  • Page 401 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.busy_tone_delay 0, 3 or 5 Description: Configures the duration time (in seconds) to play the busy tone when the call is released by the other party. 0-0s, the IP phone will not play a busy tone. 3-3s, a busy tone is audible for 3 seconds on the IP phone.

  • Page 402: Return Code When Refuse

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Return Code When Refuse Return code when refuse defines the return code and reason of the SIP response message for the refused call. The caller’s phone LCD screen displays the reason according to the received return code.

  • Page 403: Early Media

    Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.normal_refuse_code 404, 480, 486 or 603 Description: Configures a return code and reason of SIP response messages when the IP phone rejects an incoming call. A specific reason is displayed on the caller’s phone LCD screen. 404-Not Found 480-Temporarily Unavailable 486-Busy Here, the caller’s phone LCD screen will display the message “Busy Here”...

  • Page 404: 180 Ring Workaround

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones is actually established. Current implementation supports early media through the 183 message. When the caller receives a 183 message with SDP before the call is established, a media channel is established. This channel is used to provide the early media stream for the caller.
  • Page 405 Configuring Basic Features Procedure 180 ring workaround can be configured using the following methods. Configure 180 ring workaround. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) phone_setting.is_deal180 Configure 180 ring workaround. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default...

  • Page 406: Use Outbound Proxy In Dialog

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of 180 Ring Workaround. Click Confirm to accept the change. Use Outbound Proxy in Dialog An outbound proxy server can receive all initiating request messages and route them to the designated destination.
  • Page 407 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default sip.use_out_bound_in_dialog 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send all SIP requests to the outbound proxy server forcibly in a dialog. 0-Disabled, only the new SIP request messages from the IP phone will be sent to the outbound proxy server in a dialog.

  • Page 408: Sip Session Timer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones SIP Session Timer SIP session timers T1, T2 and T4 are SIP transaction layer timers defined in 3261. These session timers are configurable on IP phones. Timer T1 Timer T1 is an estimate of the Round Trip Time (RTT) of transactions between a SIP client and SIP server.
  • Page 409 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.timer_t1 Float from 0.5 to10 Description: Configures the SIP session timer T1 (in seconds). T1 is an estimate of the Round Trip Time (RTT) of transactions between a SIP client and SIP server.

  • Page 410: Session Timer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Enter the desired value in the SIP Session Timer T4 (2.5~60s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Session Timer Session timer allows a periodic refresh of SIP sessions through an UPDATE request, to determine whether a SIP session is still active.
  • Page 411 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Session timer can be configured using the following methods. Configure session timer. Parameters: Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg account.X.session_timer.enable (Configuration File) account.X.session_timer.expires account.X.session_timer.refresher Configure session timer. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=a ccount-adv&q=load&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.session_timer.enable...
  • Page 412 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Session Expires(30~7200s) Phone User Interface: None account.X.session_timer.refresher 0 or 1 Description: Configures the function of the endpoint who initiates the SIP request for a specific account.

  • Page 413: Ignoring Incoming Calls

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired refresher from the pull-down list of Session Refresher. Click Confirm to accept the change. Ignoring Incoming Calls The phone behavior for the incoming call arrived when the IP phone is in a call is depended on the parameter “features.ignore_incoming_call.enable”.

  • Page 414: Call Hold

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Ignore Incoming Call can be configured using the configuration file. Configure the Ignore Incoming Call. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Central Provisioning Parameter: <MAC>.cfg (Configuration Files) features.ignore_incoming_call.enabl Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.ignore_incoming_call.enable...
  • Page 415 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Call hold can be configured using the following methods. Configure the Call Hold Tone. Parameters: features.play_hold_tone.enable features.play_hold_tone.delay features.play_hold_tone.interval Configure the Call Held Tone. Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg features.play_held_tone.enable features.play_held_tone.delay Central Provisioning features.play_held_tone.interval (Configuration Files) Specify whether RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0) outgoing hold signaling is used.
  • Page 416 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Play Hold Tone Phone User Interface: None features.play_hold_tone.delay Integer from 3 to 3600 Description: Configures the time (in seconds) to wait for the IP phone to play the initial call hold tone.
  • Page 417 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default party. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Play Held Tone Phone User Interface: None features.play_held_tone.delay Integer from 3 to 3600 Description: Configures the time (in seconds) to wait for the IP phone to play the initial call held tone. If it is set to 30 (30s), the IP phone will wait 30 seconds to play the initial call held tone after you are held by the other party.
  • Page 418 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Enables or disables the IP phone to use RFC 2543 (c=0.0.0.0) outgoing hold signaling. 0-Disabled, SDP media direction attributes (such as a=sendonly) per RFC 3264 is used when placing a call on hold.

  • Page 419: Music On Hold (Moh)

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired time in the Play Hold Tone Delay field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure call hold method via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of RFC 2543 Hold. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 420 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones account automatically responds to the INVITE message and immediately plays audio from some source located anywhere (LAN, Internet) to the held party. For more information, refer to draft RFC draft-worley-service-example.
  • Page 421 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Music Server URI Phone User Interface: None account.X.music_on_hold_type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the way to process Music On Hold when placing an active call on hold for a specific account. 0-Calling the Music On Hold server before holding the call 1-Calling the Music On Hold server after holding the call Web User Interface:...

  • Page 422: Call Forward

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Enter the SIP URI (for example, sip:moh@sip.com) in the Music Server URI field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Forward Call forward allows users to redirect an incoming call to a third party. IP phones redirect an incoming INVITE message by responding with a 302 Moved Temporarily message, which contains a Contact header with a new URI that should be tried.
  • Page 423 You can configure a call forward DSS key with an assigned value. When you press the call forward DSS key, the IP phone will activate the Always Forward feature and forward all incoming Yealink calls to the number specified in the value field. For more information, refer to...
  • Page 424 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones account.X.always_fwd.off_code account.X.busy_fwd.enable account.X.busy_fwd.target account.X.busy_fwd.on_code account.X.busy_fwd.off_code account.X.timeout_fwd.enable account.X.timeout_fwd.target account.X.timeout_fwd.timeout account.X.timeout_fwd.on_code account.X.timeout_fwd.off_code Configure Call Forward Feature Synchronization on a per-line basis. Parameter: account.X.features.forward.feature_ key_sync.local_processing.enable Enable or disable the call forward feature. Parameter: features.fwd.allow...
  • Page 425 Configuring Basic Features Configure call forward in phone mode. Parameters: forward.always.enable forward.always.target forward.always.on_code forward.always.off_code forward.busy.enable forward.busy.target forward.busy.on_code forward.busy.off_code forward.no_answer.enable forward.no_answer.target forward.no_answer.timeout forward.no_answer.on_code forward.no_answer.off_code Configure diversion/history-info feature. Parameter: features.fwd_diversion_enable Configure forward international. Parameter: forward.international.enable Configure Call Forward Feature Synchronization. Parameters: features.feature_key_sync.enable features.forward.feature_key_sync.e nable features.forward.feature_key_sync.lo...
  • Page 426 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure diversion/history-info feature. Configure forward international. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Configure call forward. Phone User Interface Configure forward international. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.fwd.allow 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the call forward feature.
  • Page 427 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, a user changes the forward status on server, the server notifies the phone of synchronizing the status. Conversely, if the user changes forward status on the phone, the IP phone notifies the server of synchronizing the status. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.feature_key_sync.enable”...
  • Page 428 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default features.fwd_mode 0 or 1 Description: Configures the call forward mode for the phone system. 0-Phone, call forward feature is effective for the phone system. 1-Custom, you can configure call forward feature for each or all accounts.
  • Page 429 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->AccountX->Always Forward->Target Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->AccountX->Always Forward->Forward to String within 32 account.X.always_fwd.on_code Blank characters Description: Configures the always forward on code to activate the server-side always forward feature for a specific account.
  • Page 430 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->AccountX->Always Forward->Off Code 0 or 1 account.X.busy_fwd.enable Description: Triggers busy forward feature to on or off for a specific account. 0-Off 1-On, incoming calls to the account X are forwarded to the destination number (configured by the parameter “account.X.busy_fwd.target”) when the callee is busy.
  • Page 431 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default number (configured by the parameter “account.X.busy_fwd.target”) to the server when you activate busy forward feature for a specific account on the IP phone. Example: account.1.busy_fwd.on_code = *74 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled) and value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode”...
  • Page 432 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->AccountX->No Answer Forward->On/Off Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->AccountX->No Answer Forward->No Answer Forward String within 32 account.X.timeout_fwd.target Blank characters Description: Configures the destination number of the no answer forward for a specific account.
  • Page 433 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the no answer forward on code to activate the server-side no answer forward feature for a specific account. The IP phone will send the no answer forward on code and the pre-configured destination number (configured by the parameter “account.X.timeout_fwd.target”) to the server when you activate no answer forward feature for a specific account on the IP phone.
  • Page 434 1-Enabled, the call from authorized numbers will not be forwarded when the call forward feature is activated. Note: For Yealink IP phones, it works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->Forward Emergency...
  • Page 435 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->Always Forward->Always Forward String within 32 forward.always.target Blank characters Description: Configures the destination number of the always forward for the phone system. Example: forward.always.target = 4608 Note: It works only if the values of parameters “features.fwd.allow” and “forward.always.enable”...
  • Page 436 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the always forward off code to deactivate the server-side always forward feature. The IP phone will send the always forward off code to the server when you deactivate always forward feature on the phone system.
  • Page 437 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Forward&DND->Forward->Busy Forward->Target Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward-> Busy Forward->Forward to String within 32 forward.busy.on_code Blank characters Description: Configures the busy forward on code to activate the server-side busy forward feature. The IP phone will send the busy forward on code and the pre-configured destination number (configured by the parameter “forward.busy.target”) to the server when you activate busy forward feature on the phone system.
  • Page 438 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default forward.no_answer.enable 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the no answer forward feature to on or off for the phone system. 0-Off 1-On, incoming calls are forwarded to the destination number (configured by the parameter “forward.no_answer.target”) after a period of ring time.
  • Page 439 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->No Answer Forward->After Ring Time (0~120s) Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->No Answer Forward->After Ring Time String within 32 forward.no_answer.on_code Blank characters Description: Configures the no answer forward on code to activate the server-side no answer forward feature.
  • Page 440 Enables or disables the IP phone to forward incoming calls to international numbers (the prefix is 00). 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: For Yealink IP phones, it works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Fwd International Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin)->FWD International->FWD International...
  • Page 441 Configuring Basic Features Multiple numbers are separated by commas. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure call forward via web user interface: Click on Features->Forward&DND. In the Forward block, mark the desired radio box in the Mode field. If you mark the Phone radio box: Mark the desired radio box in the Always/Busy/No Answer Forward field.
  • Page 442 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the pull-down list of After Ring Time(0~120s) (only for the no answer forward). Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure Diversion/History-Info feature via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.
  • Page 443 Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Fwd International. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure call forward in phone mode via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Call Forward. Press to select the desired forwarding type, and then press the Enter soft key. Depending on your selection: If you select Always Forward: Press...
  • Page 444 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones On Code and Off Code field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the After Ring Time field. The default ring time is 12 seconds.

  • Page 445: Call Transfer

    Configuring Basic Features No Answer Forward field. Enter the destination number you want to forward all unanswered incoming calls to in the Forward to field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the After Ring Time field.
  • Page 446 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones numbers match the dial plan. Procedure Call transfer can be configured using the following methods. Specify whether to complete the transfer through on-hook. Parameters: transfer.blind_tran_on_hook_enable transfer.on_hook_trans_enable Central Configure semi-attended transfer Provisioning feature.
  • Page 447 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Transfer->Blind Transfer On Hook Phone User Interface: None transfer.on_hook_trans_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to complete the semi-attended/attended transfer through on-hook besides pressing the Trans/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: Semi-attended transfer means transfer a call after hearing the ringback tone;...

  • Page 448: Conference

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It is only applicable to old dial plan mechanism. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None To configure call transfer via web user interface: Click on Features->Transfer.
  • Page 449 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.X.conf_type 0 or 2 Description: Configures the conference type for a specific account. 0-Local Conference, conference is set up with other two parties via the IP phone when the value of parameter “features.conference.local.enable”...

  • Page 450: Local Conference

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Local Conference Local conference requires a host phone to process the audio of all parties. Yealink IP phones support up to 3 parties (including yourself) in a local conference call.

  • Page 451: Network Conference

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to merge two calls into a conference directly by pressing the Conf/Conference soft key, CONF key or conference DSS key when there are two calls on the phone.
  • Page 452 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Network conference can be configured using the following methods. Configure network conference URI. Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) account.X.conf_uri Configure network conference URI. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p...

  • Page 453: Transfer On Conference Hang Up

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the conference URI in the Conference URI field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Transfer on Conference Hang Up For a local three-way conference, if the conference initiator leaves the conference, all parties are disconnected and the conference call ends. Transfer on Conference Hang Up feature allows the other two parties to remain connected when the conference initiator drops the conference call.

  • Page 454: Transfer Mode Via Dsskey

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default transfer.tran_others_after_conf_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to transfer the local conference call to the other two parties after the conference initiator drops the local conference call.
  • Page 455 Configuring Basic Features The transfer mode via dsskey feature is available to the following DSS keys: Speed Dial DSS key  Transfer DSS key with an assigned value  BLF/BLF List DSS key  For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879.

  • Page 456: Allow Trans Exist Call

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default None To configure transfer mode via dsskey via web user interface: Click on Features->Transfer. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Transfer Mode via Dsskey.
  • Page 457 Configuring Basic Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=fea tures-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 transfer.multi_call_trans_enable Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to transfer the current call to a new call or another existing call during multiple calls when user presses the Trans/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key.

  • Page 458: Directed Call Pickup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Directed Call Pickup Directed call pickup is used for picking up an incoming call on a specific extension. A user can pick up the incoming call using a directed pickup DSS key or the DPickup soft key. This feature depends on support from a SIP server.
  • Page 459 Configuring Basic Features expansion_module.X.key.Y.line linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label linekey.X.shortlabel Assign a directed call pickup DSS key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= dsskey&q=load&model=0 Configure directed call pickup code on a per-line basis. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=a ccount-adv&q=load&acc=0 Configure directed call pickup feature on a phone basis.
  • Page 460 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None features.pickup.direct_pickup_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the DPickup soft key when the IP phone is on the dialing screen.
  • Page 461 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.type programablekey.X.type expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a directed call pickup DSS key on the IP phone. Note: EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Type Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Type...
  • Page 462 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Account ID linekey.X.value programablekey.X.value String within 99 characters expansion_module.X.key.Y.value Description: Configures the directed call pickup feature code followed by the monitored extension. If you have configured the directed call pickup code on a phone basis (configured by the parameter “features.pickup.direct_pickup_code”), you can configure the monitored...
  • Page 463 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label X is the line key ID. For SIP-T48G/S, X=1-29; for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-27; for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=1-15; for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G, X=1-21; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3, for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2. X is the programable key ID.
  • Page 464 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Enter the directed call pickup code in the Directed Call Pickup Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure directed call pickup feature on a phone basis via web user interface: Click on Features->Pick up &...

  • Page 465: Group Call Pickup

    Configuring Basic Features (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the directed call pickup code followed by the specific extension in the Value field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Group Call Pickup Group call pickup is used for picking up incoming calls within a pre-defined group.
  • Page 466 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones expansion_module.X.key.Y.line linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label linekey.X.shortlabel Assign a group call pickup DSS key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dssk ey&q=load&model=0 Configure the group call pickup code on a per-line basis. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=acco...
  • Page 467 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.group_pickup_code String within 32 characters Blank Description: Configures the group pickup code for a specific account. Example: account.1.group_pickup_code = *98 Note: The group call pickup code configured on a per-line basis (configured by the parameter “account.X.group_pickup_code”) takes precedence over that configured on a phone basis (configured by the parameter “features.pickup.group_pickup_code”).
  • Page 468 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.type programablekey.X.type expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a group call pickup DSS key on the IP phone. Note: EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones.
  • Page 469 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Account ID linekey.X.value programablekey.X.value String within 99 characters expansion_module.X.key.Y.value Description: Configures the group call pickup feature code. Example: linekey.2.value = *98 Note: EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Value Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 470 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label X is the line key ID. For SIP-T48G/S, X=1-29; for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-27; for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=1-15; for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G, X=1-21; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3, for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2.
  • Page 471 Configuring Basic Features Enter the group call pickup code in the Group Call Pickup Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure group call pickup feature on a phone basis via web user interface: Click on Features->Pick up & Park. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Group Call Pickup.

  • Page 472: Dialog Info Call Pickup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the group call pickup code in the Value field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 473 CSeq: 1 INVITE Contact: <sip:1010@10.10.20.18:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.82.0.20 Replaces: 0_1756536024@10.10.20.34;to-tag=3779921438;from-tag=3408640225 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Supported: replaces Content-Length: Procedure Dialog info call pickup can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 474: Recent Call In Dialing

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones X is the account ID. For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-16; for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S, X=1-12; for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G, X=1-6; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3; for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2. To configure dialog info call pickup via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced.
  • Page 475 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Recent call in dialing can be configured using the following methods. Configure recent call in dialing feature. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.c Parameter: (Configuration File) super_search.recent_call Configure recent call in dialing feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=cont acts-favorite&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter...

  • Page 476: Recall

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Recent Call In Dialing. Click Confirm to accept the change. ReCall ReCall, also known as last call return, allows users to place a call back to the last caller. Recall is implemented on IP phones using a recall DSS key.
  • Page 477 Configuring Basic Features Assign a recall DSS key. Phone User Interface ReCall DSS Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.type programablekey.X.type expansion_module.X.key.Y.type...

  • Page 478: Call Number Filter

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label X is the line key ID. For SIP-T48G/S, X=1-29; for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-27; for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=1-15; for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G, X=1-21; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3, for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2.
  • Page 479 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Call number filter can be configured using the following methods. Configure the characters the IP phone Central filters when dialing. Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) features.call_num_filter Configure the characters the IP phone filters when dialing. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=fea tures-general&q=load...

  • Page 480: Call Park

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Enter the desired characters in the Call Number Filter field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Park Call park allows users to park a call on a special extension and then retrieve it from another phone (for example, a phone in another office or conference room).
  • Page 481 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Call park can be configured using the following methods. Configure call park feature. Parameters: features.call_park.park_mode features.call_park.enable features.call_park.park_code features.call_park.park_retrieve_code features.call_park.direct_send.enable features.call_park.line_restriction.ena Assign a call park DSS key. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Assign a retrieve park DSS key. (Configuration File) Parameters: linekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type...
  • Page 482 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default 1 or 2 features.call_park.park_mode Description: Configures the call park mode. 1-FAC 2-Transfer Web User Interface: Features->Pick up & Park->Call Park Mode Phone User Interface: None features.call_park.enable...
  • Page 483 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the park retrieve code for the Retrieve soft key. This park retrieve code will also apply to the retrieve park DSS key. Example: features.call_park.park_retrieve_code = *88 Web User Interface: Features->Pick up & Park->Park Retrieve Code Phone User Interface: None features.call_park.direct_send.enable...
  • Page 484 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Call Park DSS Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879.
  • Page 485 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values … 16-Line 16 Example: linekey.2.line = 1 Note: This parameter is only required if the value of the parameter “features.call_park.line_restriction.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is not applicableto SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones.
  • Page 486 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=1-15; for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G, X=1-21; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3, for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2. X is the Ext key ID. For SIP-T54S/T52S, X=1-3, Y=1-60; for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S, X=1-6, Y=1-40; for SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G, X=1-6, Y=1-40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 487 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values linekey.2.line = 1 Note: This parameter is only required if the value of the parameter “features.call_park.line_restriction.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones.
  • Page 488 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label...
  • Page 489 Configuring Basic Features Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a retrieve park DSS key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Retrieve Park from the pull-down list of Type. Enter the park retrieve code in the Value field.

  • Page 490: Calling Line Identification Presentation (Clip)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired account from the Account ID field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
  • Page 491 Configuring Basic Features If there is not any Privacy: id header in the INVITE request, the IP phone checks and presents the caller identification from the P-Preferred-Identity header. If there is not P-Preferred-Identity header in the INVITE request, the IP phone checks and presents the caller identification from the P-Asserted-Identity header.
  • Page 492 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones identification derived from the FROM header. Calling and Connected For more information on calling line identification presentation, refer to Line Identification Presentation on Yealink IP Phones Procedure CLIP can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 493 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values 0-FROM 1-PAI 2-PAI-FROM 3-RPID-PAI-FROM 4-PAI-RPID-FROM 5-RPID-FROM 6-PREFERENCE, the IP phone uses the custom priority order for the sources of caller identity information (configured by the parameter “sip.cid_source.preference”). Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Caller ID Source Phone User Interface: None account.X.cid_source_privacy...
  • Page 494 Configures the priority order for the sources of caller identity information. The headers can be in any order. Note: Yealink IP phones support deriving caller identity from the following SIP headers: From, P-Asserted-Identity (PAI), P-Preferred-Identity and Remote-Party-ID (RPID). It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.cid_source”...

  • Page 495: Connected Line Identification Presentation (Colp)

    Connected Line Identification source = Dialed digits Yealink IP phones present the connected line identification according to the dialed digits. Connected Line Identification source = RFC4916 Yealink IP phones support to present the connected line identification from UPDATE message following the 4916.
  • Page 496 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure COLP can be configured only using the configuration file. Configure the presentation of the callee’s identity. Parameter: account.X.cp_source Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg (Configuration File) Specify whether to process Privacy header field.

  • Page 497: Mute

    SIP-T19(P) E2, X=1. Mute Yealink IP phones support muting the microphone of the active audio device (handset, headset or speakerphone) during an active call or while dialing. You can activate the mute feature by pressing the MUTE key. Normally, mute feature is automatically deactivated when the active call ends.
  • Page 498 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 features.allow_mute Description: Enables or disables the allow mute feature for the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, you are allowed to mute an active call, or activate the mute feature on the pre-dialing/dialing/calling/ringing screen (Mute the microphone on the calling screen is only applicable to the SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G IP phones).

  • Page 499: Keep Mute

    Configuring Basic Features Keep Mute Keep mute, also known as persistent mute, allows you to keep the mute state of your phone persist. By default, the mute feature is automatically deactivated when the active call ends. When you enable keep mute feature and activate the mute feature, the phone stays in the mute state until you press the MUTE key again or the phone restarts.

  • Page 500: Intercom

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default None Intercom Intercom allows establishing an audio conversation directly. The IP phone can answer intercom calls automatically. This feature depends on support from a SIP server.
  • Page 501 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Intercom can be configured using the following methods. Configure the intercom subscription. Parameters: features.intercom.led.enable features.intercom.subscribe.enable Configure the intercom mode. Parameter: features.intercom.mode features.intercom.feature_access_code Assign an intercom DSS key. Parameters: Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>. linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ (Configuration File) expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.line/ programablekey.X.line/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.line linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/...
  • Page 502 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default when the status of monitored user changes. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.intercom.subscribe.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 503 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the intercom feature access code. Note: It works only if the value of parameter “features.intercom.mode” is set to 1 (FAC). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Intercom DSS Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879.
  • Page 504 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) 1-Line 1 2-Line 2 … 16-Line 16 Example: linekey.2.line = 1 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones.
  • Page 505 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Note: This parameter only applies to intercom and BLF features. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Extension Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Extension linekey.X.label...

  • Page 506: Incoming Intercom Calls

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure an intercom DSS key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select Intercom from the pull-down list of Type.
  • Page 507 Configuring Basic Features Intercom Tone Intercom Tone allows the IP phone to play a warning tone before answering an intercom call. Intercom Barge Intercom Barge allows the IP phone to automatically answer an incoming intercom call while an active call is in progress. The active call will be placed on hold. If you disable this feature, the IP phone will handle an incoming intercom call like a normal incoming call while there is already an active call on the IP phone.
  • Page 508 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled, the IP phone will automatically answer an incoming intercom call. Web User Interface: Features->Intercom->Intercom Allow Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Intercom->Intercom Allow features.intercom.mute 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to mute the microphone when answering an intercom call.
  • Page 509 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled, the IP phone will handle an incoming intercom call like a normal incoming call while there is already an active call on the IP phone. 1-Enabled, the IP phone will automatically answer the intercom call while there is already an active call on the IP phone and place the active call on hold.

  • Page 510: Call Timeout

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure intercom via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Intercom. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired values from the Intercom Allow, Intercom Mute, Intercom Tone and Intercom Barge fields.

  • Page 511: Send User=Phone

    Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.6:5060;branch=z9hG4bK2475812834 From: "1010" <sip:1010@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=3747068208 To: <sip:101@10.2.1.48:5060;user=phone> Call-ID: 0_4008470062@10.3.20.6 CSeq: 1 INVITE Contact: <sip:1010@10.3.20.6:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.82.0.20 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync...
  • Page 512 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Content-Length: 300 Procedure Send user=phone can be configured using the following methods. Configure send user=phone feature on a per-line basis. Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) account.X.enable_user_equal_phone Configure send user=phone feature on a per-line basis.

  • Page 513: Sip Send Mac

    From: "11" <sip:11@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2788360609 To: "11" <sip:11@10.2.1.48:5060> Call-ID: 1_1863786852@10.3.20.14 CSeq: 2 REGISTER Contact: <sip:11@10.3.20.14:5060;line=cc75882e976e208> Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.82.0.20 Expires: 0 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Mac: 00:15:65:74:b1:50 Content-Length: 0...
  • Page 514 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure SIP send MAC can be configured using the following methods. Configure SIP send MAC on a per-line basis. Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) account.X.register_mac Configure SIP send MAC on a per-line basis.

  • Page 515: Sip Send Line

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of SIP Send MAC. Click Confirm to accept the change. SIP Send Line The IP phone can send the line number in the REGISTER message. SIP send line allow adding “Line:<linenumber>”(for example, Line: 1) to the SIP header of the REGISTER message.
  • Page 516 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Contact: <sip:11@10.3.20.14:5060;line=1da6aa8d7254654> Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.82.0.20 Expires: 0 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Line: 1 Content-Length: 0 Procedure SIP send line can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 517: Reserve # In User Name

    Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.6:5060;branch=z9hG4bK1867789050 From: "1010" <sip:1010%23@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=1945988802 To: <sip:2@10.2.1.48:5060> Call-ID: 0_2336101648@10.3.20.6 CSeq: 1 INVITE Contact: <sip:1010%23@10.3.20.6:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.82.0.20 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Content-Length:...
  • Page 518 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Reserve # in User Name can be configured using the following methods. Configure reserve # in user name. Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter: (Configuration File) sip.use_23_as_pound Configure reserve # in user name.

  • Page 519: Password Dial

    Configuring Basic Features Password Dial Password dial feature allows the callee number to be partly displayed on the IP phone when placing a call. The hidden digits are displayed as asterisks on the LCD screen. The number in placed call list is also partly displayed on the IP phone. This feature is especially useful for users who are always placing important and confidential calls.
  • Page 520 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default features.password_dial.prefix = 12 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.password_dial.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->PswPrefix Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 521: Unregister When Reboot

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired number of hidden digits in the PswLength field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Unregister When Reboot Unregister when reboot feature allows IP phones to unregister first before re-registering the account when finishing a reboot. Procedure Unregister when reboot can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 522: 100 Reliable Retransmission

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default finishing a reboot. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Unregister When Reboot Phone User Interface: None X is the account ID. For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-16; for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S, X=1-12;...
  • Page 523 Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.82.0.20 Supported: 100rel Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Content-Length: Procedure 100 Reliable Retransmission can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 524: Reboot In Talking

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 account.X.100rel_enable Description: Enables or disables the 100 reliable retransmission feature for a specific account. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Retransmission...
  • Page 525 Configuring Basic Features you need to specify the trusted IP address(es) for action URI in advance. For more information, refer to Configuring Trusted IP Address for Action URI on page 645. Procedure Reboot in talking can be configured using the following methods. Configure reboot in talking.

  • Page 526: Answer By Hand

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Reboot in Talking field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.

  • Page 527: Usb Recording

    None USB Recording Yealink IP phones support recording during a call. Before recording, ensure that the USB flash drive has been inserted into the USB port of the phone. Call recording is only applicable to SIP-T54S, SIP-T52S, SIP-T48G/S, SIP-T46G/S, SIP-T42S, SIP-T41S, SIP-T29G and SIP-T27G IP phones.

  • Page 528: Csta Control

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.usb_call_recording.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the call recording (using a USB flash drive) feature for the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, you can record the active audio call for the phone by pressing the Start REC soft key, and the recorded calls will be saved to the USB flash drive.

  • Page 529: Quick Login

    Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.csta_control.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the uaCSTA (User Agent Computer Supported Telecommunications Applications) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 530 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones the web user interface. It is helpful for users to quickly log into the web user interface without entering the username and password in the login page. The use of the quick login feature may be restricted by the web explorer (e.g., Internet Explorer).

  • Page 531: Cfg File Version Information Customization

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None CFG File Version Information Customization You can customize the version information for the CFG configuration file and then check the version information via phone/web user interface. With this feature, you can easily know which version of the CFG configuration file the IP phone is configured.
  • Page 532 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones...

  • Page 533: Configuring Advanced Features

    Configuring Advanced Features Configuring Advanced Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following advanced features: Remote Phone Book  Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)  Busy Lamp Field (BLF)  Busy Lamp Field (BLF) List  Hide Feature Access Codes ...

  • Page 534: Remote Phone Book

    URL of the file (Menu.xml) in the configuration file. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for remote XML phone book template. You can also obtain the remote XML phone book template online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage.
  • Page 535 Configuring Advanced Features Where: Specify the contact name between <Name> and </Name>. Specify the contact number between <Telephone> and </Telephone>. Save the file and place this file to the provisioning server. When creating a Menu.xml file, learn the following: <YealinkIPPhoneMenu> indicates the start of a remote phone book file and ...
  • Page 536 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones For each department that you want to add, add the following strings to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <MenuItem> Department1 <Name> </Name> http://10.2.9.1:99/Department.xml <URL> </URL> </MenuItem> For each XML file that you want to add, add the following strings to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <SoftKeyItem>...
  • Page 537 During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the remote phone book file “Menu.xml”. Yealink supplies a phonebook generation tool to generate a remote XML phone book. For more Note Yealink Phonebook Generation Tool User Guide...
  • Page 538 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones the remote phone book for outgoing/incoming calls. Specify how often the IP phone refreshes the local cache of the remote phone book. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=contacts -remote&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 539 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default String within 99 Blank remote_phonebook.display_name characters Description: Configures the display name of the remote phone book. Example: remote_phonebook.display_name = Friends “Friends” will be displayed on the LCD screen at the phone path Menu->Directory. If it is left blank, “Remote Phone Book”...
  • Page 540 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None features.remote_phonebook.enter_update_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to refresh the local cache of the remote phone book at a time when accessing the remote phone book.

  • Page 541: Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (Ldap)

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the desired time in the Update Time Interval(Seconds) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) LDAP is an application protocol for accessing and maintaining information services for the distributed directory over an IP network. IP phones can be configured to interface with a corporate directory server that supports LDAP version 2 or 3.
  • Page 542 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones LDAP Attributes The following table lists the most common attributes used to configure the LDAP lookup on IP phones. Abbreviation Name Description givenName First name LDAP attribute is made up from given commonName name joined to surname.
  • Page 543 Configuring Advanced Features ldap.call_in_lookup ldap.call_out_lookup ldap.ldap_sort ldap.incoming_call_special_search.e nable ldap.numb_display_mode ldap.customize_label Assign an LDAP DSS key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label linekey.X.shortlabel Configure LDAP. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =contacts-LDAP&q=load Web User Interface Assign an LDAP DSS key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0 Assign an LDAP DSS key.
  • Page 544 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None ldap.search_type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the search type for LDAP contact look up. 0-Prefix matching, the IP phone will search the LDAP contact numbers or names start with the entered character(s).
  • Page 545 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None String within 99 ldap.number_filter Blank characters Description: Configures the search criteria for looking up LDAP contact numbers. The “*” symbol in the filter stands for any number. The “%” symbol in the filter stands for the number entered by the user.
  • Page 546 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default IP address or ldap.host Blank domain name Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the LDAP server. Example: ldap.host = 10.2.1.55 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “ldap.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 547 This parameter can be left blank in case the server allows anonymous to login. Otherwise you will need to provide the user name to login the LDAP server. Example: ldap.user = cn=manager,dc=yealink,dc=cn Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “ldap.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->Username...
  • Page 548 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: A very large value of this parameter will slow down the LDAP search speed, therefore it should be configured according to the available bandwidth. It works only if the value of the parameter “ldap.enable”...
  • Page 549 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None String within 99 ldap.display_name Blank characters Description: Configures the display name of the contact record displayed on the LCD screen. The value must start with “%” symbol. Example: ldap.display_name = %cn The cn of the contact record is displayed on the LCD screen. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “ldap.enable”...
  • Page 550 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None ldap.call_out_lookup 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to perform an LDAP search when placing a call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “ldap.enable”...
  • Page 551 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0044123456789 from the LDAP sever first, if no result found, it will search +44123456789 from the server again. The phone will display all the search results. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “ldap.call_in_lookup” is set to 1 (Enabled). You may need to set the value of the parameter “ldap.name_filter”...
  • Page 552 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None LDAP DSS Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879. LDAP DSS key can be configured only if the LDAP feature is enabled.
  • Page 553 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values (X ranges from 1 to 21) Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label X is the line key ID.

  • Page 554: Busy Lamp Field (Blf)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure an LDAP DSS key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select LDAP from the pull-down list of Type.

  • Page 555: Blf Subscription

    To: <sip:1011@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2527548726 Call-ID: 0_3538292381@10.3.20.1 CSeq: 2 SUBSCRIBE Contact: <sip:1010@10.3.20.1:5060> Accept: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T46G 28.82.0.20 Expires: 30 Event: dialog Content-Length: 0 Example of a NOTIFY message (<state>confirmed</state> shows the call has been established): NOTIFY sip:1010@10.3.20.1:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.2:5060;branch=z9hG4bK276311022 From: <sip:1011@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=3436332841...
  • Page 556 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones <dialog id="74" call-id="0_2561109579@10.3.20.1" local-tag="2778958897" remote-tag="1132018898" direction="recipient"> <state>confirmed</state> <local> <identity>sip:1011@10.2.1.48:5060</identity> <target uri="sip:1011@10.2.1.48:5060"/> </local> <remote> <identity>sip:1010@10.2.1.48:5060</identity> <target uri="sip:1010@10.2.1.48:5060"/> </remote> </dialog> </dialog-info> Procedure BLF can be configured using the following methods. Configure the period of the BLF subscription.
  • Page 557 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default Integer from 30 to account.X.blf.subscribe_period 1800 2147483647 Description: Configures the period (in seconds) of the BLF subscription for a specific account. The IP phone is able to successfully refresh the SUBSCRIBE before expiration of the SUBSCRIBE dialog.
  • Page 558 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None X is the account ID. For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-16; for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S, X=1-12; for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G, X=1-6; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3; for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2. To configure BLF subscription via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced.

  • Page 559: Visual Alert And Audio Alert For Blf Pickup

    Configuring Advanced Features Visual Alert and Audio Alert for BLF Pickup Visual and audio alert for BLF pickup allow the supervisor’s phone to play a specific ring tone and display a visual prompt (for example, “6001<-6002”, 6001 is the monitored extension which receives an incoming call from 6002) when the monitored user receives an incoming call.
  • Page 560 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure ring type for BLF pickup. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.pickup.blf_visual_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display a visual alert when the monitored user receives an incoming call.
  • Page 561 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: features.blf.ring_type = Ring5.wav Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.pickup.blf_audio_enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->Pick up & Park->Ring Type for BLF Pickup Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Sound->BLF Ring Type features.pickup_display.method...

  • Page 562: Blf Led Mode

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired ring tone from the pull-down list of Ring Type for BLF Pickup. Click Confirm to accept the change. To select a ring tone for BLF pickup via web user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Sound->BLF Ring Type.
  • Page 563 Configuring Advanced Features LED Status Description The monitored user does not exist. Line Key/Expansion Module Key LED (configured as a BLF DSS key or a BLF List DSS key and BLF LED Mode is set to 1) LED Status Description Fast-flashing red (200ms) The monitored user receives an incoming call.
  • Page 564 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones LED Status Description The monitored user does not exist. Line Key/Expansion Module Key LED (configured as a BLF DSS key or a BLF List DSS key and BLF LED Mode is set to 4. This mode is specifically designed for the Genband server.)

  • Page 565: Configuring Blf Led Status And Blf Dss Key Behavior

    Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of BLF LED Mode. Click Confirm to accept the change. Configuring BLF LED Status and BLF DSS Key Behavior You can customize the BLF LED status (or BLF icon colors for SIP-T48G/T48S IP phones) and BLF/BLF List DSS key behavior using the EDK macros if required.
  • Page 566 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones blf.enhanced.idle.enable blf.enhanced.idle.led blf.enhanced.idle.callin.action blf.enhanced.idle.talking.action blf.enhanced.idle.idle.action Configure BLF LED status/icon colors and BLF/BLF List DSS key behavior when the monitored user is ringing. Parameters: blf.enhanced.callin.enable blf.enhanced.callin.led blf.enhanced.callin.callin.action blf.enhanced.callin.talking.action blf.enhanced.callin.idle.action Configure BLF LED status/icon colors and BLF/BLF List DSS key behavior when the monitored user is calling out.
  • Page 567 Configuring Advanced Features blf.enhanced.parked.led blf.enhanced.parked.callin.action blf.enhanced.parked.talking.action blf.enhanced.parked.idle.action Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default blf.enhanced.idle.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the custom configuration when the monitored user is idle. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, the IP phone will display the custom BLF/BLF List DSS key LED status/icon colors and perform the custom behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF List DSS key.
  • Page 568 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.idle.idle.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list DSS key if the monitor and monitored user are idle.
  • Page 569 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list DSS key if the monitor is talking and monitored user is idle. This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key. Example: blf.enhanced.idle.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 570 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T48G/T48S IP phones, the BLF/BLF List DSS key field displays a green icon for 1000ms and then the icon color turns to white. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.callin.enable”...
  • Page 571 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None blf.enhanced.callin.talking.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list DSS key if the monitor is talking and monitored user is ringing. This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key. Example: blf.enhanced.callin.talking.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 572 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default blf.enhanced.callout.led = $LEDg1000o$ SIP-T54S/T52S/T46G/T46S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G/T29G/T27P/T27G/T23P/T23 G/T21(P) E2 IP phones, the BLF/BLF list DSS key LED illuminates solid green for 1000ms and then goes out. For SIP-T48G/T48S IP phones, the BLF/BLF List DSS key field displays a green icon for 1000ms and then the icon color turns to white.
  • Page 573 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. It works only if the value of the parameter “blf.enhanced.callout.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.callout.talking.action String Blank...
  • Page 574 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the custom BLF/BLF List DSS key LED status/icon colors when the monitored user is talking. This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key.
  • Page 575 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list DSS key if the monitor is ringing and monitored user is talking. This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key. Example: blf.enhanced.talking.callin.action = newcall Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 576 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.parked.led String Blank Description: Configures the custom BLF/BLF List DSS key LED status/icon colors when a call is being parked against the monitored phone.
  • Page 577 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None blf.enhanced.parked.callin.action String Blank Description: Configures the behavior when pressing the BLF/BLF list DSS key if the monitor is ringing and a call is being parked against the monitored phone. This value uses the same macro action string syntax as an Enhanced DSS key.

  • Page 578: Configuring A Blf Dss Key

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configuring a BLF DSS Key You can configure a BLF DSS key on a supervisor’s phone to monitor the IP phone user status (busy or idle). For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to...
  • Page 579 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Dsskey->Line Key->Type Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Type linekey.X.line Refer to the following content expansion_module.X.key.Y.line Description: Configures the desired line to apply the BLF DSS key. Permitted Values: 1 to 16 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G) 1 to 12 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S) 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G) 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 580 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Value linekey.X.pickup_value String within 256 characters expansion_module.X.key.Y.pickup_value Description: Configures the pickup code for BLF feature. Example: line.2.pickup_value = *88 Note: This parameter only applies to intercom and BLF feature. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.

  • Page 581: Using Blf Dss Key To Initiate An Intercom Call

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label X is the line key ID. For SIP-T48G/S, X=1-29; for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-27; for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=1-15; for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G, X=1-21; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3, for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2. X is the Ext key ID. For SIP-T54S/T52S, X=1-3, Y=1-60; for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S, X=1-6, Y=1-40;...
  • Page 582 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Initiate an intercom call using BLF DSS key can be configured using the configuration file. Configure the IP phone to initiate an intercom call using BLF DSS key. Parameter: Central features.blf.intercom_mode.enable...

  • Page 583: Busy Lamp Field (Blf) List

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None String within 32 features.intercom.feature_access_code Blank characters Description: Configures the intercom feature access code. Note: It works only if the value of parameter “features.intercom.mode” is set to 1 (FAC). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 584 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Specify whether to automatically configure the BLF list DSS keys. Parameter: phone_setting.auto_blf_list_enable Configure the order of BLF list DSS keys assigned automatically. Parameter: <y0000000000xx>.cfg phone_setting.blf_list_sequence_type Assign a BLF List DSS key.
  • Page 585 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None phone_setting.blf_list_sequence_type 0, 1, 2 or 3 Description: Configures the order of BLF list DSS keys assigned automatically. 0-Line Key->Ext Key (Expansion1->Expansion2…) 1-Ext Key (Expansion1->Expansion2…)->Line Key 2-Line Key (first page)->Ext Key (first page on Expansion1->first page on Expansion2…)->Line Key (second page)->Ext Key (second page on Expansion1->second page on Expansion2…)…...
  • Page 586 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the feature access code for directed call pickup for a specific account. Example: account.1.blf_list_code = *97 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 587 Configuring Advanced Features for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G, X=1-6; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3; for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2. BLF List DSS Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879. To manually configure BLF list DSS key, make sure the value of the parameter “phone_setting.auto_blf_list_enable”...
  • Page 588 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Line Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Account ID X is the line key ID. For SIP-T48G/S, X=1-29; for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-27; for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=1-15;...

  • Page 589: Hide Feature Access Codes

    Configuring Advanced Features To configure BLF List DSS keys manually via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select BLF List from the pull-down list of Type. Repeat the step 2, configure more BLF list DSS keys. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 590: Automatic Call Distribution (Acd)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones =features-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Permitted Parameter Default Values features.hide_feature_access_codes.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display feature name instead of the feature access code when dialing or in talk.
  • Page 591 Configuring Advanced Features ACD enables the use of IP phones in a call-center role by automatically distributing incoming calls to available users, or agents. ACD depends on support from a SIP server. ACD is disabled on the IP phone by default. You need to enable it on a per-line basis before logging into the ACD system.
  • Page 592 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Assign an ACD DSS key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0 Assign an ACD DSS key. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.acd.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables ACD feature for a specific account.
  • Page 593 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.acd.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->ACD Subscribe Period(120~3600s) Phone User Interface: None acd.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to automatically change the status of the ACD agent to available after the designated time.
  • Page 594 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones ACD DSS Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.type expansion_module.X.key.Y.type...
  • Page 595 Configuring Advanced Features X is the line key ID. For SIP-T48G/S, X=1-29; for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-27; for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=1-15; for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G, X=1-21; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3, for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2. X is the Ext key ID. For SIP-T54S/T52S, X=1-3, Y=1-60; for SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S, X=1-6, Y=1-40;...

  • Page 596: Shared Call Appearance (Sca)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Enter the desired timer in the ACD Subscribe Period(120~3600s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure an ACD DSS key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key.
  • Page 597 Configuring Advanced Features SCA supports the IP phones barging in an active call. In addition, SCA has the call pull capability. Call pull feature allows users to retrieve an existing call from another shared phone that is in active or public hold status. If the call is placed on public hold, the held call is available for any shared party to retrieve.
  • Page 598 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones ettings-softkey&q=load Assign a private hold DSS key. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= dsskey&q=load&model=0 Assign a private hold DSS key. Phone User Interface Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.shared_line 0, 1 or 3 Description: Configures the registration line type for a specific account.
  • Page 599 Configuring Advanced Features Private Hold Soft Key Configuring the private hold soft key may affect the softkey layout in the Talking state. For more information, refer to Softkey Layout on page 252. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.custom_softkey_enable 0 or 1 Description:...
  • Page 600 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.type expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key to be a private hold DSS key on the IP phone. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones.
  • Page 601 Configuring Advanced Features Y=1-40; for SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G, X=1-6, Y=1-40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). To configure the shared line settings on the primary phone via web user interface: Register the primary account (for example, 4609). Click on Advanced, select Shared Call Appearance from the pull-down list of Shared Line.
  • Page 602 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure the shared line settings on alternate phone via web user interface: Register the alternate account (for example, 4609_1). (Enter the primary account 4609 in the Register Name field.) Click on Advanced, select Shared Call Appearance from the pull-down list of Shared Line.
  • Page 603 Configuring Advanced Features To configure the call pull feature access code via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Enter the call pull feature access code (for example, *11) in the Call Pull Feature Access Code field.

  • Page 604: Bridge Lines Appearance (Bla)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The PriHold appears in the Selected Softkeys column. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a private hold DSS key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Private Hold from the pull-down list of Type.
  • Page 605 Configuring Advanced Features depends on support from a SIP server. Any IP phone can be used to originate or receive calls on the bridge line. An incoming call to the BLA number can be presented to multiple phones in the group simultaneously. The incoming call can be answered on any IP phone of the group but not all.
  • Page 606 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled, the shared line feature is disabled. 1-Shared Call Appearance 3-Draft BLA Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Shared Line Phone User Interface: None String within 99 account.X.bla_number Blank...

  • Page 607: Message Waiting Indicator (Mwi)

    Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select Draft BLA from the pull-down list of Shared Line. Enter the desired value in the BLA Number field. Enter the desired value in the BLA Subscription Period field. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 608 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure subscribe for MWI. Parameters: account.X.subscribe_mwi account.X.subscribe_mwi_expires Configure subscribe MWI to voice mail. Parameter: account.X.subscribe_mwi_to_vm Central Provisioning <MAC>.cfg Configure the voice mail number on a (Configuration File) per-line basis.
  • Page 609 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default account. 0-Disabled, the server automatically sends a message-summary NOTIFY in a new dialog each time the MWI status changes. (This requires server support). 1-Enabled, the IP phone will send a SUBSCRIBE message to the server for message-summary updates.
  • Page 610 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default characters Description: Configures the voice mail number for a specific account. Example: voice_mail.number.1 = 1234 Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Voice Mail Phone User Interface: Menu->Message->Voice Mail->Set Voice Mail->AccountX Code account.X.display_mwi.enable...
  • Page 611 Configuring Advanced Features Enter the period time in the MWI Subscription Period(Seconds) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure subscribe MWI to voice mail via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Subscribe for MWI.

  • Page 612: Short Message Service (Sms)

    Click Confirm to accept the change. Short Message Service (SMS) SMS feature allows users to send and receive text messages using Yealink IP phones. It depends on support from a SIP server. You can send text messages by initiating a new dialogue or by replying to a received message.

  • Page 613: Multicast Paging

    Configuring Advanced Features When receiving a new text message, the phone will play a warning tone. The power indicator LED will slowly flash red, and the LCD screen will prompt receiving new text messages with the number of waiting messages or a flashing icon. You can customize the warning tone or select specialized tone sets (vary from country to country) for your IP phone.

  • Page 614: Sending Rtp Stream

    Up to 31 listening multicast addresses can be specified on the IP phone. Yealink IP phones support the following 31 channels: 0: Broadcasts are sent to channel 0. Note that the Yealink IP phones running firmware  version 80 or earlier can be regarded as listening to channel 0. It is the default channel.
  • Page 615 Configuring Advanced Features Parameter: multicast.paging_address.X.channel Assign a multicast paging DSS key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label linekey.X.shortlabel linekey.X.extension/ programablekey.X.extension/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.extension Assign a paging list DSS key. Parameter: linekey.X.type/ programmable.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ programmable.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label linekey.X.shortlabel Specify a multicast codec for the IP phone to send the RTP stream.
  • Page 616 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dsskey &q=load&model=0 Configure the multicast IP address and port number for a paging list DSS key. Configure the multicast paging group name for a paging list DSS key. Phone User Interface Configure the channel of the multicast paging group for a paging list DSS key.
  • Page 617 Configures the channel of the multicast paging group in the paging list. If it is set to 0, all the Yealink IP phones running firmware version 80 or prior or Yealink IP phones listens to channel 0 or third-party available devices (for example, Cisco IP phones) in the paging group can receive the RTP stream.
  • Page 618 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Multicast Paging DSS Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.type...
  • Page 619 Configuring Advanced Features SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 characters (X ranges from 1 to 21) Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones.
  • Page 620 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Paging List DSS key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.type...
  • Page 621 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label X is the line key ID. For SIP-T48G/S, X=1-29; for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-27; for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=1-15; for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G, X=1-21; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3, for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2. X is the programable key ID.
  • Page 622 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired channel from the pull-down list Channel. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a multicast paging DSS key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key).

  • Page 623: Receiving Rtp Stream

    Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a multicast paging DSS key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
  • Page 624 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones specify priority value, the incoming multicast paging calls with higher or equal priority are automatically answered and the ones with lower priority are ignored. Ignore DND Ignore DND feature defines the lowest priority of the multicast paging call that can be received when DND is activated in phone mode.
  • Page 625 If it is set to 1 to 25, the IP phone can receive an RTP stream of the pre-configured multicast address on the channel 1 to 25 respectively from Yealink or Polycom IP phones. If it is set to 26 to 30, the IP phone can receive the RTP stream of the pre-configured...
  • Page 626 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default multicast address on the channel 26 to 30 respectively from Yealink IP phones. Example: multicast.listen_address.1.channel = 2 Web User Interface: Directory->Multicast IP->Multicast Listening->Channel Phone User Interface: None multicast.listen_address.X.volume...
  • Page 627 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default multicast.receive_priority.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to handle the incoming multicast paging calls when there is an active multicast paging call on the IP phone. 0-Disabled, the IP phone will ignore the incoming multicast paging calls when there is an active multicast paging call on the IP phone.
  • Page 628 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the lowest priority of the multicast paging call that can be received when DND is activated in phone mode. 1 is the highest priority, 31 is the lowest priority.

  • Page 629: Dsskey Recording (Record And Url Record)

    Dsskey Recording (Record and URL Record) Yealink IP phones support record calls by pressing the call record DSS key. It depends on support from a SIP server. When the user presses the call record DSS key, the IP phone sends a record request to the server.

  • Page 630: Url Record

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Content-Length: 0 When the user presses the record DSS key again, the IP phone sends a SIP INFO message to the server with the specific header “Record: off”, and then the recording stops.
  • Page 631 Configuring Advanced Features <Title> </Title> <Text> Probably the recording box is full. </Text> <YealinkIPPhoneText> When the user presses the URL record DSS key again, the IP phone sends an HTTP GET message to the server, and then the server will respond with a 200 OK message. Example of a 200 OK message: <YealinkIPPhoneText>...
  • Page 632 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones =dsskey&q=load&model=0 Assign a record DSS key and URL Phone User Interface record DSS key. Record DSS Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879.
  • Page 633 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label X is the line key ID. For SIP-T48G/S, X=1-29; for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-27; for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S, X=1-15;...
  • Page 634 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Dsskey->Line Key->Value Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Value linekey.X.label String within 99 characters expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key.
  • Page 635 Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a URL record DSS key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select URL Record from the pull-down list of Type. Enter the URL in the Value field.

  • Page 636: Hot Desking

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Hot Desking Hot desking originates from the definition of being the temporary physical occupant of a work station or surface by a particular employee. A primary motivation for hot desking is cost reduction.
  • Page 637 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values hotdesking.dsskey_register_name_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of register name on the hot desking logon wizard when pressing the Hot Desking DSS key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, the original register name information will be cleared.
  • Page 638 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values hotdesking.dsskey_sip_server_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of SIP server on the hot desking logon wizard when pressing the Hot Desking DSS key.
  • Page 639 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Configures a DSS key as a hot desking DSS key on the IP phone. Note: EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Type Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Type linekey.X.label programablekey.X.label String within 99 characters...

  • Page 640: Logon Wizard

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure a hot desking DSS key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Hot Desking from the pull-down list of Type.
  • Page 641 Configuring Advanced Features Configure the logon wizard. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=feature s-general&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 phone_setting.logon_wizard Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide the logon wizard after startup when there is no registered account.
  • Page 642 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.logon_wizard” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None hotdesking.startup_password_enable...
  • Page 643 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default hotdesking.startup_outbound_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of outbound server on the logon wizard after startup when there is no registered account. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.logon_wizard” is set to 1 (Enabled).

  • Page 644: Action Url

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Action URL Action URL allows IP phones to interact with web server applications by sending an HTTP or HTTPS GET request. You can specify a URL that triggers a GET request when a specified event occurs.
  • Page 645 Configuring Advanced Features Event Description UnHeld When a held call is resumed. Mute When the IP phone mutes a call. UnMute When the IP phone un-mutes a call. Missed Call When the IP phone misses a call. IP Changed When the IP address of the IP phone changes. Idle To Busy When the state of the IP phone changes from idle to busy.
  • Page 646 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The following table lists pre-defined variable values. Variable Value Description $mac The MAC address of the IP phone. The IP address of the IP phone. $model The IP phone model.
  • Page 647 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure Action URL can be configured using the following methods. Configure action URL. Parameters: action_url.setup_completed action_url.registered action_url.unregistered action_url.register_failed action_url.off_hook action_url.on_hook action_url.incoming_call action_url.outgoing_call action_url.call_established action_url.dnd_on action_url.dnd_off action_url.always_fwd_on action_url.always_fwd_off action_url.busy_fwd_on action_url.busy_fwd_off Central Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cfg action_url.no_answer_fwd_on (Configuration File) action_url.no_answer_fwd_off action_url.transfer_call action_url.blind_transfer_call action_url.attended_transfer_call action_url.hold...
  • Page 648 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones action_url.reject_incoming_call action_url.answer_new_incoming_call action_url.transfer_finished action_url.transfer_failed action_url.setup_autop_finish action_url.call_waiting_on action_url.call_waiting_off action_url.headset action_url.handfree action_url.cancel_callout action_url.remote_busy action_url.call_remote_canceled Configure action URL. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-actionurl&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.setup_completed...
  • Page 649 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Registered Phone User Interface: None action_url.unregistered Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends after an account is unregistered. Example: action_url.unregistered = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Unregistered Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 650 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None action_url.on_hook Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when on hook. Example: action_url.on_hook = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->On Hook...
  • Page 651 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.call_established Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when establishing a call. Example: action_url.call_established = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Established Phone User Interface: None action_url.dnd_on Blank URL within 511 characters Description:...
  • Page 652 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when always forward feature is activated. Example: action_url.always_fwd_on = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Open Always Forward...
  • Page 653 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.busy_fwd_off = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Close Busy Forward Phone User Interface: None action_url.no_answer_fwd_on Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when no answer forward feature is activated. Example: action_url.no_answer_fwd_on = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface:...
  • Page 654 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Action URL->Transfer Call Phone User Interface: None action_url.blind_transfer_call Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when performing a blind transfer.
  • Page 655 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None action_url.unhold Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when resuming a hold call. Example: action_url.unhold = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->UnHold Phone User Interface: None action_url.held Blank...
  • Page 656 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when muting a call. Example: action_url.mute = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Mute Phone User Interface: None action_url.unmute...
  • Page 657 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.call_terminated = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Terminated Phone User Interface: None action_url.busy_to_idle Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when changing the state of the IP phone from busy to idle.
  • Page 658 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.ip_change = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->IP Changed Phone User Interface: None action_url.forward_incoming_call Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when forwarding an incoming call.
  • Page 659 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Answer New Incoming Call Phone User Interface: None action_url.transfer_finished Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when completing a call transfer. Example: action_url.transfer_finished = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Transfer Finished...
  • Page 660 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Autop Finish Phone User Interface: None action_url.call_waiting_on Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when call waiting feature is enabled.
  • Page 661 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None action_url.handfree Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when pressing the Speakerphone key. Example: action_url.handfree = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Handfree Phone User Interface: None action_url.cancel_callout...
  • Page 662 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None action_url.call_remote_canceled Blank URL within 511 characters Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when the remote party cancels the outgoing call in the ringing state.

  • Page 663: Action Uri

    SIP Notify Message In addition, Yealink IP phones support performing the specified action immediately by accepting a SIP NOTIFY message with the “Event: ACTION-URI” header from a SIP proxy server. The message body of the SIP NOTIFY message may contain variable named as “key” and variable value, which are separated by “=”.
  • Page 664 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Message Body key=OK The following table lists pre-defined variable values: Variable Value Phone Action Press the OK/√ key. Press the Enter soft key. (not applicable to ENTER SIP-T48S/T48G IP phones) SPEAKER Press the Speakerphone key.
  • Page 665 Variable Value Phone Action AutoP Perform auto provisioning. Activate the DND feature. Note: For Yealink IP phones, it works only if the DNDOn value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled). Deactivate the DND feature. Note: For Yealink IP phones, it works only if the DNDOff value of the parameter “features.dnd.allow”...
  • Page 666 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Variable Value Phone Action Activate an always/busy/no answer forward feature to xxx for the IP phone (“xxx” means the destination number) The valid value of “n” means the duration time (seconds) before forwarding incoming calls (n is the times of 6, for example, 24).

  • Page 667: Configuring Trusted Ip Address For Action Uri

    Configuring Advanced Features Yealink IP phones also support a combination of the variable values in the URI, but the order of the variable value is determined by the operation of the phone. The valid URI format is: http(s)://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?key=variable value[;variable value] .
  • Page 668 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Specify the trusted IP address(es) for sending the action URI to the IP phone. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-remotecontrl&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.action_uri.enable...
  • Page 669 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the IP address of the server from which the IP phone receives the action URI requests. For discontinuous IP addresses, multiple IP addresses are separated by commas. For continuous IP addresses, the format likes *.*.*.* and the “*” stands for the values 0~255. For example: 10.10.*.* stands for the IP addresses that range from 10.10.0.0 to 10.10.255.255.

  • Page 670: Scenario A - Capturing The Current Screen Of The Phone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Scenario A - Capturing the Current Screen of the Phone You can capture the screen display of the IP phone using the action URI. IP phones support handling an HTTP or HTTPS GET request. The URI format is http(s)://<phoneIPAddress>/screencapture.

  • Page 671: Scenario B - Placing A Call Via Web User Interface

    Else, the browser will display an image of the phone’s current screen directly. You can save the image to your local system. Frequent capture may affect the phone performance. Yealink recommend you to capture the Note phone screen display within a minimum interval of 4 seconds.

  • Page 672: Server Redundancy

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Enter the callee’s number in the Dial Number field. Click Dial to dial out the number. The web user interface prompts “Call Success” and the phone will automatically dial out the number.
  • Page 673 Working Server: Server 1 is configured with the domain name of the working server. For example: yealink.pbx.com. DNS mechanism is used such that the working server is resolved to multiple servers with different IP addresses for failover purpose. The working server is deployed in redundant pairs, designated as primary and secondary servers.

  • Page 674: Phone Registration

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones If the secondary server is also unavailable, the IP phone will try the fallback server until it either succeeds in making a call or exhausts all servers at which point the call will fail.
  • Page 675 Configuring Advanced Features Configure the outbound proxy server redundancy. Parameters: account.X.outbound_proxy_enable account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.address account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.port account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.retry_counts Fallback Mode Parameters: account.X.fallback.redundancy_type account.X.fallback.timeout account.X.outbound_proxy_fallback_interval Failover Mode for SIP server Parameters: account.X.sip_server.Y.register_on_enable account.X.sip_server.Y.only_signal_with_registered account.X.sip_server.Y.invite_retry_counts account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_mode account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_timeout account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_subscribe.enable Failover Mode for outbound proxy server Parameters: account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.register_on_enable account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.only_signal_with_regi stered account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.invite_retry_counts...
  • Page 676 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.sip_server.Y.address String within 256 Blank characters (Y ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the SIP server Y that accepts registrations for a specific account.
  • Page 677 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None account.X.sip_server.Y.retry_counts Integer from 0 to (Y ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Configures the retry times for the IP phone to resend requests when the SIP server Y is unavailable or there is no response from the SIP server Y for a specific account.
  • Page 678 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.sip_server.Y.register_on_enable” is set to 1 (Enabled) and the value of the parameter “account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_mode” is set to 1, 2 or 3.
  • Page 679 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Account->Register->Outbound Proxy Server Y Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Accounts->Outbound ProxyY account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.port Integer from 0 to 5060 65535 (Y ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Configures the port of the outbound proxy server Y for a specific account.
  • Page 680 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default sending requests to it for a specific account when encountering a failover. 0-Disabled, the IP phone won’t attempt to register to the secondary outbound proxy server, since the phone assumes that the primary and secondary outbound proxy servers share registration information.
  • Page 681 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default “account.X.sip_server.Y.invite_retry_counts” to take effect. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None account.X.fallback.redundancy_type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the registration mode for a specific account in fallback mode. 0-Concurrent Registration 1-Successive Registration Note: It is not applicable to outbound proxy servers. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 682 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: account.1.outbound_proxy_fallback_interval = 3600 Note: It is only applicable to outbound proxy servers. Web User Interface: Account->Register->Proxy Fallback Interval Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Accounts->Proxy Fallback Interval account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_mode...
  • Page 683 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default a failover event occurs with the current working server. If you set the parameter from 1 to 59, the timeout will be 60 seconds. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_mode” is set to 3 (duration).
  • Page 684 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 2-Registration: the IP phone will send requests to the last registered outbound proxy server first. If the registration expires, the phone will retry to send requests to the primary outbound proxy server.
  • Page 685 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default server, for ensuring the normal use of the features associated with subscription (for example, BLF, SCA). If it is set to -1, the IP phone will invoke the value of the parameter “account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_subscribe.enable” to take effect. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.outbound_proxy.Y.failback_mode”...
  • Page 686 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones If you use outbound proxy servers, do the following: Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable Outbound Proxy Server. Configure parameters of outbound proxy server 1 and outbound proxy server 2 in the corresponding fields.

  • Page 687: Server Domain Name Resolution

    Configuring Advanced Features Select DNS-NAPTR from the pull-down list of Transport. If you use outbound proxy servers, do the following: Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable Outbound Proxy Server. Configure parameters of outbound proxy server 1/2 in the corresponding fields. You must set the port of outbound proxy server to 0 for NAPTR, SRV and A queries.
  • Page 688 SRV query next. TCP will be used, targeted to a host determined by an SRV query of “_sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com”. If the flag of the NAPTR record returned is empty, the IP phone will perform NAPTR query again according to the previous NAPTR query result.
  • Page 689 The two records also contain a port “5060”, the IP phone uses this port. If the Target is not a numeric IP address, the IP phone performs an A query. So in this case, the IP phone uses “server1.yealink.pbx.com" and “server2.yealink.pbx.com" for the A query. A (Host IP Address) The IP phone performs an A query for the IP address of each target host name.
  • Page 690 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=acco unt-register&q=load&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.sip_server.Y.transport_type 0, 1, 2 or 3 (Y ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Configures the transport method the IP phone uses to communicate with the SIP server for a specific account.

  • Page 691: Static Dns Cache

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None X is the account ID. For SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G, X=1-16; for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S, X=1-12; for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G, X=1-6; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3; for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2; for SIP-T19(P) E2, X=1. Static DNS Cache Failover redundancy can only be utilized when the configured domain name of the server is resolved to multiple IP addresses.
  • Page 692 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Static DNS cache can be configured only using the configuration file. Configure NAPTR/SRV/A records. Parameters: dns_cache_naptr.X.name dns_cache_naptr.X.order dns_cache_naptr.X.preference dns_cache_naptr.X.replace dns_cache_naptr.X.service dns_cache_naptr.X.ttl <y0000000000xx>.cfg dns_cache_srv.X.name dns_cache_srv.X.port dns_cache_srv.X.priority dns_cache_srv.X.target Central Provisioning dns_cache_srv.X.weight (Configuration dns_cache_srv.X.ttl...
  • Page 693 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: dns_cache_naptr.1.name = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_naptr.X.order Integer from 0 to 65535 (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the order of NAPTR record X. NAPTR record with lower order is more preferred. For example, NAPTR record with the order 90 has the higher priority than that with the order 100 because 90 is lower than 100.
  • Page 694 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures a domain name to be used for the next SRV query in NAPTR record X. Example: dns_cache_naptr.1.replace = _sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_naptr.X.service...
  • Page 695 Domain name with SRV Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) prefix Description: Configures the domain name in SRV record X. Example: dns_cache_srv.1.name = _sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_srv.X.port Integer from 0 to 65535 (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the port to be used in SRV record X.
  • Page 696 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None dns_cache_srv.X.target Domain name Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the domain name of the target host for an A query in SRV record X.
  • Page 697 None dns_cache_a.X.name Domain name Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the domain name in A record X. Example: dns_cache_a.1.name = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_a.X.ip IP address Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the IP address that the domain name in A record X maps to.
  • Page 698 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None account.X.dns_cache_type 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures whether the IP phone uses the DNS cache for domain name resolution of the server and caches the additional DNS records for a specific account.

  • Page 699: Real-Time Transport Protocol (Rtp) Ports

    Configuring Advanced Features Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) Ports The Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is a network protocol for delivering audio over IP networks. The phone is compatible with RFC 1889 - RTP: A Transport Protocol for Real-Time Applications - and the updated 3550.
  • Page 700 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Integer from static.network.port.max_rtpport 12780 1024 to 65535 Description: Configures the maximum local RTP port. Note: The value of the maximum local RTP port cannot be less than that of the minimum local RTP port (configured by the parameter “static.network.port.min_rtpport”).

  • Page 701: Tr-069 Device Management

    Configuring Advanced Features TR-069 Device Management TR-069 is a technical specification defined by the Broadband Forum, which defines a mechanism that encompasses secure auto-configuration of a CPE (Customer-Premises Equipment), and incorporates other CPE management functions into a common framework. TR-069 uses common transport mechanisms (HTTP and HTTPS) for communication between CPE and ACS (Auto Configuration Servers).
  • Page 702 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones RPC Method Description File types supported by IP phones are: Configuration File  Log File  This method is used to request the CPE to schedule a ScheduleInform one-time Inform method call (separate from its periodic Inform method calls) sometime in the future.
  • Page 703 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values static.managementserver.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the TR-069 feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Settings->TR069->Enable TR069 Phone User Interface: None String static.managementserver.username within 128 Blank characters Description: Configures the user name for the IP phone to authenticate with the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers).
  • Page 704 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Web User Interface: Settings->TR069->ACS Password Phone User Interface: None URL within static.managementserver.url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers). Example: static.managementserver.url = http://officetelprov.orangero.net:8080/ftacs-digest/ACS...
  • Page 705 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Example: static.managementserver.connection_request_password = acspwd Web User Interface: Settings->TR069->Connection Request Password Phone User Interface: None static.managementserver.periodic_inform_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to periodically report its configuration information to the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers).
  • Page 706 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values (Auto Configuration Servers). 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.managementserver.periodic_inform_enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 707: Xml Browser

    Google search, news service, and so on. To use the XML browser feature, you must configure an XML key in advance. Yealink IP Phones XML Browser Developer's For more information on XML browser, refer to...
  • Page 708 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Description: Configures a DSS key as an XML Browser DSS key on the IP phone. Note: EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Type...
  • Page 709 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 characters (X ranges from 1 to 21) Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 710: Enhanced Dss Keys

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the available access URL in the Value field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 711 The softkey ID is case-insensitive. $S<softkey ID>$ Example: $Sanswer$ means pressing the Answer soft key. Yealink IP phones support customizing soft keys. When invoking a custom soft key, the prefix “#” must be added. Example: If the custom softkey label is IVR1, the custom softkey id is custom_macro, then $S#custom_macro$ means pressing the IVR1 soft key.
  • Page 712 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Macro Action Description of parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” and “edk.id_mode.enable” to 1 (Enabled) and then long press the Volume Up key when the phone is idle. The functionality of performing this action is the same as that of pressing the desired hard key.
  • Page 713 Configuring Advanced Features Macro Action Description omitted if there is only one expansion module connected to the phone.) Menu (You can enter menu by executing this  command at any interface except the non-executable situations. For example, entering menu is blocked during an active call.) Home (You can return back to idle screen by ...
  • Page 714 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Macro Action Description change input method. If &M is included, the input are masked by the “*”. Example: $PEnter name&C3&N&M means prompting an Enter name pop-up box, the maximum number of input characters is 3, the input type is Number, and the input is masked by the “*”.

  • Page 715: Configuring Edk Feature

    By default, the EDK feature is disabled. Yealink IP phones support displaying the softkey id or menu item id by long pressing the Volume Up key. It is especially useful for those users who need to view the softkey id or menu item id when configuring EDK macros.
  • Page 716 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure EDK feature can be configured using the configuration file. Configure enhanced DSS keys. Parameter: features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable Central Provisioning Configure whether to display the <y0000000000xx>.cfg (Configuration File) softkey id or menu item id by long pressing the Volume Up key.

  • Page 717: Configuring Edk List

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None Configuring EDK List Using the Enhanced DSS Keys (EDK) List parameters to define a macro is useful when defining more than one soft key or DSS key. Procedure EDK list can be configured using the configuration file. Configure EDK list.

  • Page 718: Configuring Edk Prompt

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default It cannot start with a digit. This parameter must have a value, it cannot be left blank. Example: edk.edklist.2.mname = macro2 Note: If there are two or more same macros, the soft key or DSS key will invoke the macro with a smallest value of X.
  • Page 719 Configuring Advanced Features edk.edkprompt.X.type edk.edkprompt.X.userfeedback Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default edk.edkprompt.X.enable 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the Enhanced DSS Keys (EDK) prompt X for data input.

  • Page 720: Configuring Edk Soft Keys

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the type of characters entered by the user for Enhanced DSS Keys (EDK) prompt If it is set to numeric, the default input method is 123, and you can switch to abc/ABC/2aB input method.
  • Page 721 Configuring Advanced Features You can configure the soft keys to display functions depending on the phone’s menu level or call state. For example, you can make a DPickup soft key available when the phone is in an active call state. Custom soft keys can be added in the following call states: Idle - There are no active calls on the phone.
  • Page 722 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones softkey.X.use.call_failed softkey.X.use.ring_back softkey.X.use.transfer_ring_back softkey.X.use.hold softkey.X.use.held softkey.X.use.conferenced softkey.X.use.dialtone softkey.X.use.dialing Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default softkey.X.enable 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X.
  • Page 723 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default softkey.X.position Integer from 0 to 10 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the position on the LCD screen for soft key X. If it is set to 0, the soft key X is positioned in the first empty position from the left. If it is set to a value that is greater than the number of the soft keys, a More soft key appears and the soft key X is positioned in the desired position from the left.
  • Page 724 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default softkey.X.softkey_id String Blank (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the softkey id for custom softkey X. Example: softkey.1.softkey_id = custom_macro1 Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable”...
  • Page 725 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.use.connecting 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the connecting state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable”...
  • Page 726 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” and “softkey.X.enable” are set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None softkey.X.use.call_failed...
  • Page 727 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the transfer ring back state. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the values of the parameters “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” and “softkey.X.enable” are set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 728 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default softkey.X.use.conferenced 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Enables or disables the custom soft key X to be displayed in the conference state.

  • Page 729: Configuring A Custom Key

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None Configuring a Custom Key As with EDK soft keys, you can assign functions to DSS keys using macros. Before assigning functions, you have to configure a custom key DSS key in advance. Procedure Custom key DSS key can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 730 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a Custom Key DSS key on the IP phone. Note: To configure a Custom Key DSS key, make sure the value of the parameter “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable”...
  • Page 731 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled) in advance. EXT key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key/Programable Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label linekey.X.shortlabel String within 99 characters (X ranges from 1 to 21) Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key.

  • Page 732: Example Macros

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a Custom Key DSS key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS Key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Custom Key from the Type field.
  • Page 733 Configuring Advanced Features “IVR1”. The execution effect is the same. The Custom Key displays on the phone: Press the Custom Key when the phone is idle. The action string 1013$Tinvite$$Cwc$$Cp10$$Penter number&C4&N$$Tdtmf$$Cp3$$Chu$ is executed in order as follows: A prompt appears on the LCD screen. Enter a number for up to 4 digits.
  • Page 734 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones...

  • Page 735: Configuring Audio Features

    Configuring Audio Features Configuring Audio Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following audio features: Redial Tone  Ring Tones  Distinctive Ring Tones  Tones  Voice Mail Tone  Ringer Device for Headset  Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode ...

  • Page 736: Ring Tones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.redial_tone Integer within 6 digits Blank Description: Configure a number which you enter on the dialing screen, the IP phone will replay the dial tone.
  • Page 737 Configuring Audio Features The ring tone format must meet the following: Phone Model Format Single File Size Note SIP-T54S/T52S/T48S/T46S/T42S/ 2MB of space should be .wav <=8MB T41S/T27G reserved for the phone 2.4MB of space should SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G .wav <=8MB be reserved for the phone) SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T40G/T27P 5KB of space should be...
  • Page 738 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure a ring tone on a per-line basis. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=accou nt-basic&q=load&acc=0 Configure a ring tone for the IP phone. Phone User Interface Configure a ring tone for the account.
  • Page 739 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Account->Basic->Ring Type Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Sound->Ring Tones->Account X URL within 511 ringtone.url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the custom ring tone file. Example: ringtone.url = tftp://192.168.1.100/Customring.wav Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Upload Ringtone Phone User Interface: None ringtone.delete...
  • Page 740 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Click Upload to upload the file. The custom ring tone appears in the pull-down list of Ring Type. To change the ring tone for the phone via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference.

  • Page 741: Distinctive Ring Tones

    Configuring Audio Features If Common is selected, this account will use the ring tone selected for the phone. Click Confirm to accept the change. To select a ring tone for the phone via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Sound->Ring Tones->Common. Press to select the desired ring tone.
  • Page 742 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Alert-Info: <URL> Alert-Info: info=info text;x-line-id=0 1) Alert-Info: Bellcore-drN When the Alter-Info header contains the keyword “Bellcore-drN”, the IP phone will play the desired ring tone. The following table identifies the corresponding ring tone:...
  • Page 743 Configuring Audio Features The following table identifies the different Bellcore ring tone patterns and cadences (These ring tones are designed for the BroadWorks server). Minimum Nominal Maximum Pattern Cade Bellcore Tone Pattern Duration Duration Duration (ms) (ms) (ms) Ringing 1800 2000 2200 Bellcore-dr1(sta...
  • Page 744 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;info=ringtone-2 Alert-Info: <http://127.0.0.1/ringtone-2> Alert-Info: MyMelody2 Alert-Info: MyMelody2;x-line-id=1 Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;x-line-id=0;info=MyMelody2 The following table identifies the corresponding local ring tone: Value of N Ring Tone Ring1.wav Ring2.wav Ring3.wav Ring4.wav Ring5.wav Ring6.wav Ring7.wav...
  • Page 745 Configuring Audio Features Text (the ring tone can be configured by the parameter “distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.X.ringer”). If no internal ringer text maps, the IP phone will play the preconfigured local ring tone in about 10 seconds. Example: Alert-Info: info=family;x-line-id=0 Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;info=family Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;info=family;x-line-id=0 Auto Answer If the INVITE request contains the following type of strings, the IP phone will answer incoming calls automatically without playing the ring tone:...
  • Page 746 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure the internal ringer text and internal ringer file. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mod_ data&p=settings-ring&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.alert_info_url_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to download the ring tone from the URL contained in the Alert-Info header for a specific account.
  • Page 747 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Settings->Ring->Internal Ringer Text Phone User Interface: None distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.X.ringer Integer from 1 to 10 (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the desired ring tone for each internal ringer text. The value ranges from 1 to 10, the digit stands for the appropriate ring tone.

  • Page 748: Tones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Distinctive Ring Tones. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the internal ringer text and internal ringer file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Ring.
  • Page 749 Configuring Audio Features IP phone. The default tones used on IP phones are the US tone sets. Available tone sets for IP phones: Australia  Austria  Brazil  Belgium  China  Czech  Denmark  Finland  France ...
  • Page 750 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Condition Description Map String Rules) Ring Back Ring-back tone Busy When the callee is busy Congestion When the network is congested Call waiting tone (For more information on call Call Waiting...
  • Page 751 Configuring Audio Features Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=settings-tones&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.tone.country Refer to the following content Custom Description: Configures the country tone for the IP phone. Permitted Values: Custom, Australia, Austria, Brazil, Belgium, Chile, China, Czech, Czech ETSI, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Lithuania, India, Italy, Japan, Mexico, New Zealand, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Switzerland, Sweden, Russia, United States.
  • Page 752 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default example, !250/200,0/1000,200+300/500,200+500+800+1500/1000). Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.
  • Page 753 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.
  • Page 754 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Customizes the call back tone. The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.
  • Page 755 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.tone.message String Blank Description: Customizes the tone when the IP phone receives a text message. The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. If you want to disable this warning tone, set it to 0.

  • Page 756: Voice Mail Tone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones If you select Custom, you can customize a tone for each condition of the IP phone. Click Confirm to accept the change. Voice Mail Tone Voice mail tone feature allows the IP phone to play a warning tone when receiving a new voice mail.

  • Page 757: Ringer Device For Headset

    Configuring Audio Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a warning tone when it receives a new voice mail. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.display_mwi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 758 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones also should be activated in advance. The USB headset is only applicable to SIP-T41S/T42S/T46S/T48S/T52S/T54S IP phones. You can press the HEADSET key to activate the headset mode. For more information, refer to the...

  • Page 759: Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode

    Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Ringer Device for Headset. Click Confirm to accept the change. Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode Yealink IP phones support three ways to place/answer a call: using the handset, using the headset or using the speakerphone. You can disable the infrequently used audio device as required.
  • Page 760 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the phone’s audio speakerphone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None features.handset_mode.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone’s handset.

  • Page 761: Headset Prior

    Configuring Audio Features Headset Prior Headset prior allows users to use headset preferentially if a headset is physically connected to the IP phone. This feature is especially useful for permanent or full-time headset users. It is not applicable to the Bluetooth headset and USB headset. Note Procedure Headset prior can be configured using the following methods.

  • Page 762: Dual Headset

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Headset Prior. Click Confirm to accept the change. Dual Headset Dual headset allows users to use two headsets on one IP phone. To use this feature, users need to physically connect two headsets to the headset and handset jacks respectively.
  • Page 763 Configuring Audio Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.headset_training 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables dual headset feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, users can use two headsets on one phone. When the IP phone joins in a call, the users with the headset connected to the headset jack have a full-duplex conversation, while the users with the headset connected to the handset jack are only allowed to listen to.

  • Page 764: Sending Volume

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Sending Volume Sending volume allows user to adjust the sending volume of currently engaged audio devices (handset, speakerphone or headset) when the phone is in use. Procedure Sending volume can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 765 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None voice.handset_send Integer from -50 to 50 Description: Configures the sending volume of the handset. Note: We recommend that you modify this parameter cautiously. An unreasonable value may render the voice quality bad. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 766: Ringer Volume

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Enter the desired value in the Headset Send Volume (-50~50) field. Enter the desired value in the Handset Send Volume (-50~50) field. Enter the desired value in the Handfree Send Volume (-50~50) field.

  • Page 767: Audio Codecs

    Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default If it is left blank, the user can adjust the ringer volume on the phone. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Audio Codecs CODEC is an abbreviation of COmpress-DECompress, capable of coding or decoding a digital data stream or signal by implementing an algorithm.
  • Page 768 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Sample Packetization Codec Algorithm Reference Bit Rate Rate Time 16 Kbps 8 Ksps 20ms opus opus RFC 6716 20 Kbps 16 Ksps The network bandwidth necessary to send the encoded audio is typically 5~10% higher than the Note bit rate due to packetization overhead.
  • Page 769 G726-40, opus, iLBC_15_2kpbs, iLBC_13_33kpbs Audio Codec Configuration Yealink IP phones running firmware version 81 or later support a new configuration behavior for the audio codecs. It is more efficiently for you to provision a number of different IP phone modules.
  • Page 770 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values account.X.codec.<payload_type>.enable Refer to the 0 or 1 (where <payload_type> should be replaced by following content the name of audio codec) Description: Enables or disables the specified audio codec for a specific account.
  • Page 771 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values account.X.codec.<payload_type>.priority Integer from Refer to the (where <payload_type> should be replaced by 0 to 13 following content the name of audio codec) Description: Configures the priority of the enabled audio codec for a specific account. The name of audio codec: g722-G722 pcmu-PCMU...
  • Page 772 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values opus-wb or account.X.codec.opus.para opus-wb opus-nb Description: Configures the sample rate of the opus audio codec for a specific account. opus-wb-Opus-WB (16KHz) opus-nb-Opus-NB (8KHz) Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48S/T46S/T42S/T41S/T27G IP phones.

  • Page 773: Packetization Time (Ptime)

    Configuring Audio Features To configure the opus sample rate via web user interface (take SIP-T54S IP phones for example: Click on Account->Codec. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Opus Sample Rate. Click Confirm to accept the change. Packetization Time (PTime) Ptime is a measurement of the duration (in milliseconds) of the audio data in each RTP packet sent to the destination, and defines how much network bandwidth is used for the RTP stream...
  • Page 774 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Packetization Time Codec Packetization Time (Maximun) (Minimun) 30ms (40ms for G726-32 10ms SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2) 10ms 30ms G726-40 G723_53/ 30ms 60ms G723_63 iLBC 20ms 30ms opus 10ms 20ms iLBC_15_2kpbs 20ms, 40ms, 60ms...
  • Page 775 Configuring Audio Features Parameter Permitted Values Default 40-40 50-50 60-60 Example: account.1.ptime = 20 Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->PTime(ms) Phone User Interface: None To configure the ptime for the account via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of PTime(ms).

  • Page 776: Acoustic Clarity Technology

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Acoustic Clarity Technology Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) is used to reduce acoustic echo from a voice call to provide natural full-duplex communication patterns. It also increases the capacity achieved through silence suppression by preventing echo from traveling across a network.

  • Page 777: Background Noise Suppression (Bns)

    Configuring Audio Features To configure AEC via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of ECHO. Click Confirm to accept the change. Background Noise Suppression (BNS) Background noise suppression (BNS) is designed primarily for hands-free operation and reduces background noise to enhance communication in noisy environments.
  • Page 778 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones voice.vad Configure VAD. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-voice&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default voice.vad 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the VAD (Voice Activity Detection) feature on the IP phone.

  • Page 779: Comfort Noise Generation (Cng)

    Configuring Audio Features Comfort Noise Generation (CNG) Comfort Noise Generation (CNG) is used to generate background noise for voice communications during periods of silence in a conversation. It is a part of the silence suppression or VAD handling for VoIP technology. CNG, in conjunction with VAD algorithms, quickly responds when periods of silence occur and inserts artificial noise until voice activity resumes.

  • Page 780: Jitter Buffer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Settings->Voice->Echo Cancellation->CNG Phone User Interface: None To configure CNG via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of CNG.
  • Page 781 Configuring Audio Features the delay time for jitter buffer in the wired Provisioning network. (Configuration File) Parameters: voice.jib.adaptive voice.jib.min voice.jib.max voice.jib.normal Configure the mode of jitter buffer and the delay time for jitter buffer in the wireless network. Parameters: voice.jib.wifi.adaptive voice.iib.wifi.min voice.jib.wifi.max voice.jib.wifi.normal...
  • Page 782 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the minimum delay time (in milliseconds) of jitter buffer in the wired network. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.jib.adaptive” is set to 1 (Adaptive).
  • Page 783 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Fixed 1-Adaptive Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T42S/T41S/T29G/T27G IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None voice.jib.wifi.min Integer from 0 to 500 Description: Configures the minimum delay time (in milliseconds) of jitter buffer in the wireless network. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.jib.wifi.adaptive”...

  • Page 784: Dtmf

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.jib.wifi.normal Integer from 0 to 500 Description: Configures the normal delay time (in milliseconds) of jitter buffer in the wireless network. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.jib.wifi.adaptive” is set to 0 (Fixed).

  • Page 785: Methods Of Transmitting Dtmf Digit

    Configuring Audio Features the IP phone to the network, which is generated when pressing the IP phone’s keypad during a call. Each key pressed on the IP phone generates one sinusoidal tone of two frequencies. One is generated from a high frequency group and the other from a low frequency group. The DTMF keypad is laid out in a 4×4 matrix, with each row representing a low frequency, and each column representing a high frequency.
  • Page 786 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones SIP INFO DTMF digits are transmitted by the SIP INFO messages when the voice stream is established after a successful SIP 200 OK-ACK message sequence. The SIP INFO message is sent along the signaling path of the call.
  • Page 787 Configuring Audio Features Configure the number of times for the IP phone to send the end RTP Event packet. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=feature s-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.dtmf.type 0, 1, 2 or 3 Description: Configures the DTMF type for a specific account. 0-INBAND, DTMF digits are transmitted in the voice band.
  • Page 788 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 2-DTMF 3-Telephone-Event Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.dtmf.type” is set to 2 (SIP INFO) or 3 (RFC2833 + SIP INFO). Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->DTMF Info Type...
  • Page 789 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Integer from 0 to features.dtmf.min_interval Description: Configures the minimum inter-digit time (in milliseconds) between digits when a sequence of DTMF tones is played out automatically. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 790: Suppress Dtmf Display

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure the number of times to send the end RTP Event packet via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value (1-3) from the pull-down list of DTMF Repetition.
  • Page 791 Configuring Audio Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.dtmf.hide 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to suppress the display of DTMF digits during an active call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, the DTMF digits are displayed as asterisks. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Suppress DTMF Display Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 792: Transfer Via Dtmf

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Suppress DTMF Display Delay. Click Confirm to accept the change. Transfer via DTMF Call transfer is implemented via DTMF on some traditional servers. The IP phone sends specified DTMF digits to the server for transferring calls to third parties.
  • Page 793 Configuring Audio Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.dtmf.replace_tran 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send DTMF sequences for transfer function when pressing the Trans/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key. 0-Disabled, the IP phone will perform the transfer as normal when pressing the Trans/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key during a call.

  • Page 794: Play Local Dtmf Tone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure transfer via DTMF via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of DTMF Replace Tran. Enter the specified DTMF digits in the Tran Send DTMF field.

  • Page 795: Voice Quality Monitoring (Vqm)

    Configuring Audio Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.play_local_dtmf_tone_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a local DTMF tone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, you can hear the DTMF tone when pressing the IP phone’s keypad during a call. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Play Local DTMF Tone Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 796: Rtcp-Xr

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones quality report collector. Two mechanisms for voice quality monitoring are supported by Yealink IP phones: RTCP-XR  VQ-RTCPXR  RTCP-XR The RTCP-XR mechanism, compliant with RFC 3611-RTP Control Extended Reports (RTCP XR), provides the metrics contained in RTCP-XR packets for monitoring the quality of calls.

  • Page 797: Vq-Rtcpxr

    Configuring Audio Features To configure RTCP-XR feature via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Voice RTCP-XR Report. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 798 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Users can check the voice quality data of the last call via web user interface or phone user interface. Users can also specify the options of the RTP status to be displayed on the phone user interface.
  • Page 799 Configuring Audio Features Configure the options of the RTP status displayed on the phone user interface. Parameters: phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_start_time.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_stop_time.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_local_call_id.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_remote_call_id.ena phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_local_codec.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_remote_codec.enab phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter_buffer_max.e nable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_packets_lost.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_symm_oneway_del ay.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_round_trip_delay.e nable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_moslq.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_moscq.enable Configure the central report collector. Parameters: <MAC>.cfg account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_name account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_server_host account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_server_port...
  • Page 800 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones monitoring&q=load Configure the central report collector. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=account-adv& q=load&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.session_report.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send a session quality report to the central report collector at the end of each call.
  • Page 801 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Configures the interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to send an interval quality report to the central report collector periodically throughout a call. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.interval_report.enable”...
  • Page 802 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Settings->Voice Monitoring->Critical threshold for Moslq Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_delay_threshold_warning 10 to 2000 Blank Description: Configures the threshold value of one way delay (in milliseconds) that causes the phone to send a warning alert quality report to the central report collector.
  • Page 803 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the voice quality data of the last call to be displayed on web interface at path Status->RTP Status. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Display Report options on Web Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable...
  • Page 804 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_stop_time.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Current Time or Stop Time on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable”...
  • Page 805 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_local_codec.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Local Codec on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->Local Codec Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 806 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter_buffer_max.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Jitter Buffer Max on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable”...
  • Page 807 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->SymmOneWayDelay Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_round_trip_delay.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display RoundTripDelay on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable”...
  • Page 808 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->MOS-CQ Phone User Interface: None String account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_name within 32 Blank characters Description: Configures the host name of the central report collector that accepts voice quality reports contained in SIP PUBLISH messages for a specific account.
  • Page 809 Configuring Audio Features for SIP-T41P/T41S/T27P/T27G, X=1-6; for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G, X=1-3; for SIP-T21(P) E2, X=1-2; for SIP-T19(P) E2, X=1. To configure session report for VQ-RTCPXR via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of VQ RTCP-XR Session Report. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 810 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure alert report for VQ-RTCPXR via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Enter the desired value in the Warning threshold for Moslq field. Enter the desired value in the Critical threshold for Moslq field.
  • Page 811 Configuring Audio Features The RTP status will appear on the web user interface at the path: Status->RTP Status. To configure RTP status displayed on the LCD screen via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Report options on phone. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 812 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The selected list appears in the Enabled column. Repeat the step 2 to add more items to the Enabled column. To remove an item from the Enabled column, select the desired item and then click To adjust the display order of enabled items, select the desired item and then click The LCD screen will display the item(s) in the adjusted order.
  • Page 813 Configuring Audio Features Enter the port of the central report collector in the VQ RTCP-XR Collector Port field. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 814 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones...

  • Page 815: Configuring Security Features

    Configuring Security Features Configuring Security Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following security-related features: User and Administrator Passwords  Auto Logout Time  Phone Lock  Transport Layer Security (TLS)  Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) ...
  • Page 816 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones of the IP phone. Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default static.security.user_password String within 32 characters user Description: Configures the password of the user or administrator. The IP phone uses “user” as the default user password and “admin” as the default administrator password.

  • Page 817: Auto Logout Time

    Configuring Security Features Click Confirm to accept the change. If logging into the web user interface of the phone with the user credential, you need to enter the Note old user password in the Old Password field. To change the administrator password via phone user interface: Press Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Change Password.

  • Page 818: Phone Lock

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default out. Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Auto Logout Time(1~1000min) Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 819 Configuring Security Features Phone Lock Type The following table lists the operation behavior when configuring the type of phone lock: All Keys Function Keys Menu key Allowable Behavior: You are allowed to press the desired Line Key (key type is Line) or the Speakerphone key to enter The Menu the dialing screen.
  • Page 820 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Procedure Phone lock can be configured using the following methods. Configure the phone lock type. Parameters: phone_setting.phone_lock.enable phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_key_type Change the unlock PIN. Parameter: phone_setting.phone_lock.unlock_pin Configure the IP phone to automatically lock the phone after a time interval.
  • Page 821 Configuring Security Features Change the unlock PIN. Configure the IP phone to automatically lock the phone after a time interval. Assign a phone lock DSS key. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.phone_lock.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone lock feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface:...
  • Page 822 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the password for unlocking the phone. Web User Interface: Features->Phone Lock->Phone Unlock PIN(0~15 Digit) Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Change PIN phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_time_out Integer from 0 to 3600 Description: Configure the idle time (in seconds) before the IP phone is automatically locked.
  • Page 823 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None Phone Lock DSS Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 879. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values linekey.X.type programablekey.X.type expansion_module.X.key.Y.type...
  • Page 824 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Description: (Optional.) Configures the short label displayed on the LCD screen for line key. Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T52S IP phones. Web User Interface: Dsskey->Line Key->Short Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Short Label...
  • Page 825 Configuring Security Features For multiple emergency numbers, enter a comma between every two numbers. Click Confirm. To configure a phone lock DSS key via web user interface: Click on Dsskey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select Phone Lock from the pull-down list of Type. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.

  • Page 826: Transport Layer Security (Tls)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Enter the new unlock PIN again in the Confirm PIN field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. To configure a phone lock DSS key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys.
  • Page 827 Configuring Security Features EDH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA  EDH-DSS-DES-CBC3-SHA  DES-CBC3-SHA  DES-CBC3-MD5  DHE-RSA-AES128-SHA  DHE-DSS-AES128-SHA  AES128-SHA  RC2-CBC-MD5  IDEA-CBC-SHA  DHE-DSS-RC4-SHA  RC4-SHA  RC4-MD5  RC4-64-MD5  EXP1024-DHE-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA  EXP1024-DES-CBC-SHA  EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA  EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA  DES-CBC-SHA  DES-CBC-MD5 ...
  • Page 828 A unique server certificate: It is unique to an IP phone (based on the MAC address) and issued by the Yealink Certificate Authority (CA). A generic server certificate: It issued by the Yealink Certificate Authority (CA). Only if no unique certificate exists, the IP phone may send a generic certificate for authentication.
  • Page 829 Configuring Security Features Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure TLS on a per-line basis. <MAC>.cfg Parameter: account.X.sip_server.Y.transport_type Configure the TLS version. Parameter: static.security.default_ssl_method Configure trusted certificates feature. Parameters: static.security.trust_certificates static.security.ca_cert static.security.cn_validation Configure server certificates feature. Parameter: Central static.security.dev_cert...
  • Page 830 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones nt-register&q=load&acc=0 Configure trusted certificates feature. Upload the trusted certificates. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=truste d-cert&q=load Configure server certificates feature. Upload the server certificates. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=server -cert&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters...
  • Page 831 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default the IP phone will use TLS 1.1 to negotiate with the provisioning server… 4-use TLS 1.1 to negotiate with the provisioning server 5-use TLS 1.2 to negotiate with the provisioning server Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 832 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None static.security.cn_validation 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to mandatorily validate the CommonName or SubjectAltName of the certificate sent by the server.
  • Page 833 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: The certificate you want to upload must be in *.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der format. Web User Interface: Security->Trusted Certificates->Load Trusted Certificates File Phone User Interface: None static.trusted_certificates.delete http://localhost/all Blank Description: Deletes all uploaded trusted certificates. Example: static.trusted_certificates.delete = http://localhost/all Web User Interface:...
  • Page 834 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None static.phone_setting.reserve_certs_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to reserve custom certificates after it is reset to factory defaults.
  • Page 835 Configuring Security Features To configure the trusted certificates via web user interface: Click on Security->Trusted Certificates. Select the desired values from the pull-down lists of Only Accept Trusted Certificates, Common Name Validation and CA Certificates. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.

  • Page 836: Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (Srtp)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To configure the server certificates via web user interface: Click on Security->Server Certificates. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Device Certificates. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 837 Configuring Security Features a=crypto:2 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 inline:NzkyM2FjNzQ2ZDgxYjg0MzQwMGVmMGUxMzdmNWFm a=crypto:3 F8_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 inline:NDliMWIzZGE1ZTAwZjA5ZGFhNjQ5YmEANTMzYzA0 a=rtpmap:0 PCMU/8000 a=rtpmap:8 PCMA/8000 a=rtpmap:18 G729/8000 a=fmtp:18 annexb=no a=rtpmap:9 G722/8000 a=fmtp:101 0-15 a=rtpmap:101 telephone-event/8000 a=ptime:20 a=sendrecv The callee receives the INVITE message with the RTP encryption algorithm, and then answers the call by responding with a 200 OK message which carries the negotiated RTP encryption algorithm.
  • Page 838 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure SRTP feature on a per-line basis. Web User Interface Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=account-adv&q=load&acc=0 Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.X.srtp_encryption 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures whether to use voice encryption service for a specific account.

  • Page 839: Encrypting And Decrypting Files

    Click Confirm to accept the change. Encrypting and Decrypting Files Yealink IP phones support downloading encrypted files from the server and encrypting files before/when uploading them to the server. You can encrypt the following files: Configuration files: MAC-Oriented CFG file (<MAC>.cfg), Common CFG file ...
  • Page 840 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Configure the decryption method. Parameter: static.auto_provision.aes_key_in_file Configure AES keys. Parameters: static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.com static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac Specify if the contact file is encrypted when it is uploaded from the phone to the server. Parameter: static.auto_provision.encryption.directory...
  • Page 841 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.aes_key_in_file 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to decrypt configuration files using the encrypted AES keys. 0-Disabled, the IP phone will decrypt the encrypted configuration files using plaintext AES keys configured on the IP phone.
  • Page 842 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Auto Provision->Common static.auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac 16 characters Blank Description: Configures the plaintext AES key for encrypting/decrypting the MAC-Oriented files (<MAC>.cfg, <MAC>-local.cfg and <MAC>-contact.xml).
  • Page 843 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default static.auto_provision.encryption.call_log 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to encrypt <MAC>-calllog.xml file using the plaintext AES key. 0-Disabled, the call log file will be uploaded unencrypted and will replace the one (encrypted or unencrypted) stored on the server if you have configured to back up the call log to the server by the parameter “static.auto_provision.local_calllog.backup.enable”.

  • Page 844: Encrypting And Decrypting Configuration Files

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones AES keys must be 16 characters and the supported characters contain: 0-9, A-Z, a-z and the following special characters are also supported: # $ % * + , - . : = ? @ [ ] ^ _ { } ~.

  • Page 845: Procedure To Encrypt Configuration Files

    After decryption, the IP phone resolves configuration files and updates configuration settings onto the IP phone system. The following describes how to use use “Config_Encrypt_Tool.exe” to encrypt the account.cfg Yealink Configuration file. For more information on the other two encryption tools, refer to Encryption Tool User Guide The way the IP phone processes other configuration files is the same to that of the account.cfg...
  • Page 846 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones the Ctrl key and select other files. (Optional.) Click Browse to locate the target directory from your local system in the Target Directory field. The tool uses the file folder “Encrypted” as the target directory by default.

  • Page 847: Encrypting And Decrypting Contact Files

    IP phone system. Incoming Signaling Validation Yealink IP phones support the following three optional levels of security for validating incoming network signaling: Source IP address validation: ensure request is received from an IP address of a server ...
  • Page 848 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.request_validation.source.list A valid string Blank Description: Configures the name of the request method for which source IP address validation will be applied.
  • Page 849 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default sip.request_validation.event A valid string Blank Description: Configures which events specified within the Event header of SUBSCRIBE or NOTIFY request should be validated when performing the digest authentication. If it is left blank, all events will be validated. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 850 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones...

  • Page 851: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This chapter provides an administrator with general information for troubleshooting some common problems that he (or she) may encounter while using IP phones. Troubleshooting Methods IP phones can provide feedback in a variety of forms such as log files, packets, status indicators and so on, which can help an administrator more easily find the system problem and fix it.
  • Page 852 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Local Logging Procedure Local logging can be configured using the following methods. Configure local logging feature. Parameter: static.local_log.enable Configure the severity level of the logs to be reported to the <MAC>-sys.log file.
  • Page 853 Troubleshooting Parameter: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.appe Configure the waiting time before the phone uploads the <MAC>-boot.log file to the server after bootup. Parameter: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.bootl og.upload_wait_time Configure the upload path of the local log files. Parameter: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.path Configure local logging feature. Configure the severity level of the logs to be reported to the <MAC>-sys.log file.
  • Page 854 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitte Defa Parameters d Values None Integer static.local_log.level from 0 to 6 Description: Configures the lowest level of local log information to be reported to the <MAC>-sys.log file. When you choose a log level, you are including all events of an equal or higher severity level and excluding events of a lower severity level.
  • Page 855 Troubleshooting Permitte Defa Parameters d Values The permitted values: Integer from 1024 to 2048 For SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: The default value: 256 The permitted values: Integer from 256 to 1024 Example: static.local_log.max_file_size = 1024 Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Max Log File Size (1024-2048KB) Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.enable...
  • Page 856 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Example: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.upload_period = 60 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 857 Troubleshooting Permitte Defa Parameters d Values 1-Append (not applicable to TFTP Server) Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.append.limit_mode 0 or 1 Description: Configures the behavior when local log files (<MAC>-boot.log and <MAC>-sys.log) on the provisioning server or a specific server reach the maximum file size. 0-Append Delete, the server will delete the old log and the IP phone will continue to uploading log.
  • Page 858 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitte Defa Parameters d Values Configures the waiting time (in seconds) before the phone uploads the <MAC>-boot.log file to the provisioning server or a specific server after startup. Example: static.auto_provision.local_log.backup.bootlog.upload_wait_time = 121...
  • Page 859 Troubleshooting Click Confirm to accept the change. Click Export to open the file download window, and then save the file to your local system. To view the log files on your local system: The <MAC>-boot.log file can only log the last reboot events. The following figure shows a portion of a <MAC>-boot.log (for example, 00156574b150-boot.log): The <MAC>-boot.log file is forced to report the logs with all severity levels.
  • Page 860 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones You can verify whether you got the correct log through the following key fields: <0+emerg>  <1+alert>  <2+crit>  <3+error>  <4+warning>  <5+notice>  <6+info>  Syslog Procedure Syslog can be configured using the following methods.
  • Page 861 Troubleshooting static.syslog.prepend_mac_address.enable Configure syslog feature. Configure syslog server and port. Configure the transport protocol that the IP phone uses to upload log to the syslog server. Configure the lowest severity level of the logs to be displayed in the syslog. Web User Interface Configure the facility that generates the log messages.
  • Page 862 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Defa Parameters Values Settings->Configuration->Syslog Server Phone User Interface: None Integer static.syslog.server_port from 1 to 65535 Description: Configures the port of the syslog server. Example: static.syslog.port = 515 Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Port...
  • Page 863 Troubleshooting Permitted Defa Parameters Values 0-Emergency: system is unusable 1-Alert: action must be taken immediately 2-Critical: critical conditions 3-Critical: error conditions 4-Warning: warning conditions 5-Warning: normal but significant condition 6-Informational: informational messages Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Syslog Level Phone User Interface: None Integer static.syslog.facility...
  • Page 864 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Defa Parameters Values 18-local use 2 (local2) 19-local use 3 (local3) 20-local use 4 (local4) 21-local use 5 (local5) 22-local use 6 (local6) 23-local use 7 (local7) Note: For more information, refer to 3164.

  • Page 865: Capturing Packets

    Troubleshooting Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Syslog Prepend MAC. Click Confirm to accept the change. To view the syslog messages on your syslog server: You can view the syslog file in the desired folder on the syslog server. The location of the folder may differ from the syslog server.
  • Page 866 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Capturing the Packets via Web User Interface For Yealink IP phones, you can export the packets file to the local system and analyze it. To capture packets via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration.
  • Page 867 Troubleshooting =network-adv&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default static.network.span_to_pc_port 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to span data packets received from the Internet port to the PC port. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled, all data packets from Internet port can be received by PC port. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.network.pc_port.enable”...

  • Page 868: Enabling Watch Dog Feature

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. Then you can use Sniffer, Ethereal or Wireshark software to capture the signal traffic.

  • Page 869: Getting Information From Status Indicators

    Troubleshooting Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Watch Dog. Click Confirm to accept the change. Getting Information from Status Indicators Status indicators may consist of the power LED, MESSAGE key LED, line key indicator, headset key indicator and the on-screen icon. The following shows two examples of obtaining the IP phone information from status indicators on SIP-T46G IP phones: If a LINK failure of the IP phone is detected, a prompting message “Network unavailable”...
  • Page 870 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones BIN Configuration Files The config.bin file is an encrypted file. For more information on config.bin file, contact your Yealink reseller. Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods.
  • Page 871 Troubleshooting In the Export or Import Configuration block, click Export to open the file download window, and then save the file to your local system. To import a BIN configuration file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration. In the Export or Import Configuration block, click Browse to locate a BIN configuration file from your local system.

  • Page 872: Exporting All The Diagnostic Files

    Click Import to import the configuration file. Exporting All the Diagnostic Files Yealink IP phones support three types of diagnostic files (including Pcap trace, log files (boot.log and sys.log) and BIN configuration files) to help analyze your problem. You can export these files at a time and troubleshoot if necessary.

  • Page 873: Ping And Traceroute

    Troubleshooting Click Stop in the Export All Diagnostic Files field to stop the capture. The system log level will be reset to 3. Click Export to open file download window, and then save the diagnostic file to your local system. A diagnostic file named allconfig.tgz is successfully exported to your local system.
  • Page 874 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones To capture ping packets via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Diagnostics->Network->Ping. Enter an IP address or a URL address (for example, 10.2.20.148) in the Ping IP or URL field. Press the Start soft key to start a ping.

  • Page 875: Troubleshooting Solutions

    Network unreachable. Troubleshooting Solutions This section describes solutions to common issues that may occur while using the IP phone. Upon encountering a scenario not listed in this section, contact your Yealink reseller for further support. IP Address Issues Why doesn’t the IP phone get an IP address?

  • Page 876: Time And Date Issues

    Scenario 2: Yealink IP phones support using FTP, TFTP, HTTP and HTTPS protocols to download configuration files or resource files. You can use one of these protocols for provisioning. When provisioning your IP phone obtaining an IPv6 address, the provisioning server should tftp://[IPv6 support IPv6 and the format of the access URL of the provisioning server can be “...

  • Page 877: Display Issues

    Troubleshooting Display Issues Why is the LCD screen blank? Do one of the following: Ensure that the IP phone is properly plugged into a functional AC outlet.  Ensure that the IP phone is plugged into a socket controlled by a switch that is on. ...

  • Page 878: Wi-Fi And Bluetooth Issues

    Why can’t I connect the Bluetooth device with the IP phone all the time? Try to delete the registration information of the Bluetooth device on both IP phone and Bluetooth device, and then pair and connect it again. Contact Yealink field application engineer and your Bluetooth device manufacturer for more information.

  • Page 879: Firmware And Upgrading Issues

    Troubleshooting Firmware and Upgrading Issues Why doesn’t the IP phone upgrade firmware successfully? Do one of the following: Ensure that the target firmware is not the same as the current firmware.  Ensure that the target firmware is applicable to the IP phone model. ...

  • Page 880: Provisioning Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Item Description 44: SIP-T23P/G  52: SIP-T21(P) E2  53: SIP-T19(P) E2  Firmware generation. Note: The larger it is, the newer the firmware generation is. A fixed number. Firmware version.

  • Page 881: System Log Issues

    Troubleshooting System Log Issues Why can’t I export the system log to a provisioning server (FTP/TFTP server)? Do one of the following: Ensure that the FTP/TFTP server is downloaded and installed on your local system.  Ensure that you have configured the FTP/TFTP server address correctly via web user ...
  • Page 882 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones are the settings that reside on the IP phone after it has left the factory. You can also reset the IP phone to custom factory configurations if required. The custom factory configurations are the settings that defined by the user to keep some custom settings after resetting.
  • Page 883 Troubleshooting How to reset the IP phone to custom factory configurations? Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the following methods. Configure the Custom Factory Configuration feature. Parameter: Central static.features.custom_factory_config.enable Provisioning <y0000000000xx>.cf Configure the access URL of the custom factory (Configuration configuration files.
  • Page 884 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “static.features.custom_factory_config.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled) and the file format of custom factory configuration file must be *.bin. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 885: Rebooting Issues

    Troubleshooting The web user interface prompts the message “Are you sure delete user-defined factory configuration?”. Click OK to delete the custom factory configuration files. The imported custom factory file will be deleted. The IP phone will be reset to default factory configurations after resetting.
  • Page 886 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Configure the IP phone behavior when receiving a SIP NOTIFY message which contains the header “Event: check-sync”. 0-The IP phone will reboot only if the SIP NOTIFY message contains an additional string “reboot=true”.
  • Page 887 Troubleshooting The phone begins rebooting. Any reboot of the phone may take a few minutes.

  • Page 888: Protocols And Ports Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Protocols and Ports Issues What communication protocols and ports do Yealink IP phones support? Source Destination Destination Port Source IP Source Port Destination IP Protocol Description of destination port Device...
  • Page 889 Troubleshooting Source Destination Destination Port Source IP Source Port Destination IP Protocol Description of destination port Device Device (Listening port) LDAP protocol port, it is used to IP address of Determined by 1024~65535 LDAP Server obtain the contact information LDAP server destination device.
  • Page 890 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Source Destination Destination Port Source IP Source Port Destination IP Protocol Description of destination port Device Device (Listening port) gateway device. IP address TR-069 protocol port, it is used TR-069...

  • Page 891: Password Issues

    If the power indicator LED is on, the keypad is usable but the LCD screen is black, please reboot your IP phone. Why does the IP phone always display the Yealink logo? If your IP phone does not boot, check if the provisioning server is accessible on the network and a valid software firmware and valid configuration files are available.

  • Page 892: Other Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Other Issues How do I find the basic information of the IP phone? Tap Menu->Status when the IP phone is idle to check the basic information (for example, IP address, MAC address and firmware version).
  • Page 893 Troubleshooting What is the difference between enabling and disabling the RFC 2543 Hold feature? Capturing packets after you enable the RFC 2543 Hold feature. SDP media direction attributes (such as a=sendonly) per RFC 2543 is used in the INVITE message when placing a call on hold. Capturing packets after you disable the RFC 2543 Hold feature.
  • Page 894 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones For more information, refer to Shared Call Appearance (SCA) on page Bridge Lines Appearance (BLA) on page...

  • Page 895: Appendix

    Appendix Appendix Appendix A: Glossary 802.1x--an IEEE Standard for port-based Network Access Control (PNAC). It is a part of the IEEE 802.1 group of networking protocols. It provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. ACS (Auto Configuration server)--responsible for auto-configuration of the Central Processing Element (CPE).
  • Page 896 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones home, school, computer laboratory, or office building. MIB (Management Information Base)--a virtual database used for managing the entities in a communications network. OID (Object Identifier)--assigned to an individual object within a MIB.

  • Page 897: Appendix B: Time Zones

    Appendix Appendix B: Time Zones Time Zone Time Zone Name Samoa United States-Hawaii-Aleutian, United States-Alaska-Aleutian -9:30 French Polynesia United States-Alaska Time Canada(Vancouver,Whitehorse), Mexico(Tijuana,Mexicali), United States-Pacific Time Canada(Edmonton,Calgary), Mexico(Mazatlan,Chihuahua), United States-MST no DST, United States-Mountain Time Canada-Manitoba(Winnipeg), Chile(Easter Islands), Mexico(Mexico City,Acapulco), United States-Central Time, Guatemala, El Salvador, Honduras, Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Belize Bahamas(Nassau), Canada(Montreal,Ottawa,Quebec), Cuba(Havana), United States-Eastern Time, Peru...

  • Page 898: Appendix C: Trusted Certificates

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Time Zone Time Zone Name +4:30 Afghanistan(Kabul) Kazakhstan(Aqtobe), Kyrgyzstan(Bishkek), Pakistan(Islamabad), Russia(Chelyabinsk) +5:30 India(Calcutta) +5:45 Nepal(Katmandu) Kazakhstan(Astana, Almaty), Russia(Novosibirsk,Omsk) +6:30 Myanmar(Naypyitaw) Russia(Krasnoyarsk), Thailand(Bangkok) Australia(Perth), China(Beijing), Russia(Irkutsk, Ulan-Ude), Singapore(Singapore) +8:45 Eucla Japan(Tokyo), Korea(Seoul), Russia(Yakutsk,Chita)
  • Page 899 Appendix Thawte Premium Server CA  Thawte Primary Root CA  Thawte Primary Root CA - G2  Thawte Primary Root CA - G3  Thawte Server CA  VeriSign Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority  VeriSign Class 1 Public Primary Certification Authority - G2 ...
  • Page 900  SIP Core  Yealink endeavors to maintain a built-in list of most common used CA Certificates. Due to Note memory constraints, we cannot ensure a complete set of certificates. If you are using a certificate from a commercial Certificate Authority not in the list above, you can send a request to your local distributor.

  • Page 901: Appendix D: Configuring Dss Keys

    Appendix Appendix D: Configuring DSS Keys This section provides the DSS key parameters you can configure on IP phones. DSS key consists of line key (line key is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones), programable key and ext key (ext key is only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/T27G IP phones).
  • Page 902 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The following tables list relationship between the values of X in the following parameters and programable keys for each phone model. # X ranges from 1 to 14. programablekey.X.type = programablekey.X.line =...
  • Page 903 Appendix Phone SIP-T23P/ SIP-T52S/T42G/ SIP-T54S/T48G Model SIP-T29G/ SIP-T19(P) /T48S/T46G/ T23G/ T42S/T41P/ T27P/T27G T46S T21(P) E2 T41S/T40P/T40G Left Left Left Left Left Right Right Right Right Right Cancel Cancel Cancel Cancel CONF HOLD HOLD MUTE MUTE MUTE MUTE TRAN TRAN TRAN TRAN Note For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones, Cancel key can be configured only when the parameter...
  • Page 904 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones DSS key can be assigned with various key features. The parameters of the DSS key are detailed in the following: Parameter- linekey.X.type Configuration File Parameter- <y0000000000xx>.cfg programablekey.X.type Parameter- expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Configures key feature for the DSS key.
  • Page 905 Appendix Valid types are: 0-N/A 1-Conference 2-Forward 3-Transfer 4-Hold 5-DND 7-ReCall 8-SMS 9-Direct Pickup 10-Call Park 11-DTMF 12-Voice Mail 13-Speed Dial 14-Intercom 15-Line 16-BLF 17-URL 18-Group Listening 20-Private Hold 22-XML Group 23-Group Pickup 24-Multicast Paging (Paging) 25-Record 27-XML Browser 34-Hot Desking 35-URL Record 38-LDAP (only appear when the parameter “ldap.enable”...
  • Page 906 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones 66-Paging List 73-Custom Key (only appear when the parameter “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” is set to 1) For programable keys: Valid types are: 0-N/A 2-Forward 5-DND 7-ReCall 8-SMS 9-Direct Pickup 13-Speed Dial 14-Intercom...
  • Page 907 Appendix 85-Favorite (Local Favorite) For ext keys: Valid types are: 0-NA 1-Conference 2-Forward 3-Transfer 4-Hold 5-DND 7-ReCall 8-SMS 9-Direct Pickup 10-Call Park 11-DTMF 12-Voice Mail 13-Speed Dial 14-Intercom 15-Line 16-BLF 17-URL 18-Group Listening 20-Private Hold 22-XML Group 23-Group Pickup 24-Multicast Paging (Paging) 25-Record 27-XML Browser 34-Hot Desking...
  • Page 908 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones 45-Local Group 50-Phone Lock 56-Retrieve Park 61-Directory 66-Paging List 73-Custom Key (only appear when the parameter “features.enhanced_dss_keys.enable” is set to 1) Integer Format For line keys: For SIP-T48G/S IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0.
  • Page 909 Appendix When X=8, the default value is 52 (Switch Account Down). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=12, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward).
  • Page 910 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones For SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu).
  • Page 911 Appendix 3-Transfer 4-Hold 5-DND 7-ReCall 8-SMS 9-Direct Pickup 10-Call Park 11-DTMF 12-Voice Mail 13-Speed Dial 14-Intercom 15-Line 16-BLF 17-URL 18-Group Listening 20-Private Hold 22-XML Group 23-Group Pickup 24-Multicast Paging (Paging) 25-Record 27-XML Browser 28-History 30-Menu 32-New SMS 33-Status 34-Hot Desking 35-URL Record 37-Switch 38-LDAP...
  • Page 912 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones 51-Switch Account Up 52-Switch Account Down 56-Retrieve Park 61-Directory 66-Paging List 73-Custom Key 85-Favorite (Local Favorite) linekey.1.type = 8 Example Parameter- linekey.X.line Configuration File Parameter- <y0000000000xx>.cfg programablekey.X.line Parameter- expansion_module.X.key.Y.line Configures the desired line to apply the key feature. (not...
  • Page 913 Appendix For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40. For SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). When assigning the following features, you do not need to configure this parameter: 1-Conference 2-Forward...
  • Page 914 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones is not applicable. For the line key, when X=1, the default value is 1. When X=2, the default value is 2. When X=3 the default value is 3 … When X=16 the default value is 16.
  • Page 915 Appendix For programable keys: X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T54S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S) X=1-10, 13 (for SIP-T52S/T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S/T40P/T40G) X=1-14 (for SIP-T29G/T27P/T27G) X=1-10, 14 (for SIP-T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2) X=1-9, 13, 14 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) For ext keys (only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/ T27G IP phones): For SIP-T54S/T52S: X ranges from 1 to 3, Y ranges from 1 to 60. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.
  • Page 916 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP-T48G/S) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G)
  • Page 917 Appendix SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys (only applicable to SIP-T54S/T52S/T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S/T29G/T27P/ T27G IP phones): For SIP-T54S/T52S: X ranges from 1 to 3, Y ranges from 1 to 60. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.
  • Page 918 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T54S/T46G/T46S/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T42S/T41P/T41S) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T52S/T27P/T27G) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T40G/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 919 Appendix Integer Format Default Value 0 to 48 Range Configures the second remote phone book. Example linekey.1.xml_phonebook = 1 Parameter- linekey.X.extension Parameter- Configuration File programablekey.X.extension <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter- expansion_module.X.key.Y.exten sion Configures the channel of multicast paging group. This parameter is only applicable to multicast paging features.
  • Page 920 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Parameter- linekey.X.extension Parameter- Configuration File programablekey.X.extension <y0000000000xx>.cfg Parameter- expansion_module.X.key.Y.exten sion X ranges from 1 to 3, Y ranges from 1 to 60. For SIP-T48G/T48S/T46G/T46S: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 40.

  • Page 921: Appendix E: Auto Provisioning Flowchart (Keep User Personalized Configuration Settings)

    Appendix Appendix E: Auto Provisioning Flowchart (Keep User Personalized Configuration Settings) The following shows auto provisioning flowchart for Yealink IP phones when a user wishes to keep user personalized configuration settings.

  • Page 922: Appendix F: Static Settings

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Appendix F: Static Settings You may need to know the differences between the parameters started with “static.” and other common parameters: All static settings have no priority. They take effect no matter what method (web user ...

  • Page 923: Appendix G: Reading Icons

    Appendix Appendix G: Reading Icons Icons associated with different features may appear on the LCD screen. The following table provides a description for each icon on IP phones. T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P)
  • Page 924 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P Headset mode Voice Mail Text Message Auto Answer Do Not Disturb Call Forward...
  • Page 925 Appendix T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P Phone Lock Received Calls Placed Calls Missed Calls Forwarded Calls Recording starts successfully (USB recording) Recording is paused (USB recording) Recording box is full (DSSKey recording) A call cannot be recorded (DSSKey...
  • Page 926 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P recording) Recording starts successfully (DSSKey recording) Recording cannot be started (DSSKey recording)
  • Page 927 Appendix T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P Wi-Fi connection is successful Wi-Fi connection failed Conference The default contact icon The default caller photo Line key type is Line (line is seized) Line key type is Speed Dial...
  • Page 928 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P Line key type is BLF (BLF hold state) Line key type is...
  • Page 929 Appendix T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P ringing state) Park failed Line key type is Retrieve Park Line key type is Intercom (intercom idle state) Line key type is Intercom (intercom ringing state) Line key type is...
  • Page 930 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P Line key type is Local Group/XML Group/LDAP Line key type is XML...
  • Page 931 Appendix T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P (recording starts successfully) Line key type is Multicast Paging/Group Listening/Paging List Line key type is Hot Desking Line key type is ACD Line key type is Zero Touch Line key type is URL...
  • Page 932 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P The ACD state is and x and x and x and x...
  • Page 933 Appendix T23P/T23 T54S/ T42S/ T42G/ T40P T19(P) T48S T48G T46S T46G T29G T27G T27P Description G/T21(P) T52S T41S T41P (Flashing) (Flashing) (Flashing) (Flashing) (Flashing) (Flashing) USB flash drive is detected High Definition Voice...

  • Page 934: Appendix H: Sip (Session Initiation Protocol)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Appendix H: SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) This section describes how Yealink IP phones comply with the IETF definition of SIP as described 3261. This section contains compliance information in the following: RFC and Internet Draft Support ...
  • Page 935 Appendix RFC 3313—Private SIP Extensions for Media Authorization  RFC 3323—A Privacy Mechanism for the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)  RFC 3324—Requirements for Network Asserted Identity  RFC 3325—SIP Asserted Identity  RFC 3326—The Reason Header Field for the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) ...
  • Page 936 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones RFC 3969—IANA Registry for SIP URI  RFC 4028—Session Timers in the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)  RFC 4083—3GPP Release 5 Requirements on SIP  RFC 4235—An INVITE-Initiated Dialog Event Package for the Session Initiation Protocol ...

  • Page 937: Sip Request

    RFC number. SIP Request The following SIP request messages are supported: Method Supported Notes REGISTER Yealink IP phones support mid-call changes such as placing a call on hold as INVITE signaled by a new INVITE that contains an existing Call-ID.

  • Page 938: Sip Header

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Method Supported Notes PUBLISH SIP Header The following SIP request headers are supported: In the following table, a “Yes” in the Supported column means the header is sent and properly Note parsed.

  • Page 939: Sip Responses

    Appendix Method Supported Notes RAck Record-Route Refer-To Referred-By Remote-Party-ID Replaces Require Route RSeq Session-Expires Subscription-State Supported User-Agent SIP Responses The following SIP responses are supported: In the following table, a “Yes” in the Supported column means the header is sent and properly Note parsed.
  • Page 940 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones 2xx Responses—Successful 2xx Response Supported Notes 200 OK 202 Accepted In REFER transfer. 3xx Responses—Redirection 3xx Response Supported Notes 300 Multiple Choices 301 Moved Permanently 302 Moved Temporarily 305 Use Proxy 380 Alternative Service 4xx Responses—Request Failure...
  • Page 941 Appendix 4xx Response Supported Notes 416 Unsupported URI Scheme 420 Bad Extension 421 Extension Required 423 Interval Too Brief 480 Temporarily Unavailable 481 Call/Transaction Does Not Exist 482 Loop Detected 483 Too Many Hops 484 Address Incomplete 485 Ambiguous 486 Busy Here 487 Request Terminated 488 Not Acceptable Here 491 Request Pending...

  • Page 942: Sip Session Description Protocol (Sdp) Usage

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones 6xx Response Supported Notes 603 Decline 604 Does Not Exist Anywhere 606 Not Acceptable SIP Session Description Protocol (SDP) Usage SDP Headers Supported v—Session Description Protocol Version o—Owner/Creator, Session Id a—Media Attribute...

  • Page 943: Successful Call Setup And Disconnect

    The following figure illustrates the scenario of a successful call. In this scenario, the two end users are User A and User B. User A and User B are located at Yealink SIP IP phones. The call flow scenario is as follows: User A calls User B.
  • Page 944 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Step Action Description initiator in the From field. A unique numeric identifier is  assigned to the call and is inserted in the Call-ID field. The transaction number within a ...

  • Page 945: Unsuccessful Call Setup-Called User Is Busy

    The following figure illustrates the scenario of an unsuccessful call caused by the called user’s being busy. In this scenario, the two end users are User A and User B. User A and User B are located at Yealink SIP IP phones. The call flow scenario is as follows: User A calls User B.
  • Page 946 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The call cannot be set up successfully. User A Proxy Server User B F1. INVITE B F2. INVITE B F3. 100 Trying F4. 100 Trying F5. 486 Busy Here F6. 486 Busy Here F7.

  • Page 947: Unsuccessful Call Setup-Called User Does Not Answer

    The following figure illustrates the scenario of an unsuccessful call caused by the called user’s no answering. In this scenario, the two end users are User A and User B. User A and User B are located at Yealink SIP IP phones. The call flow scenario is as follows: User A calls User B.
  • Page 948 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones The call cannot be set up successfully. User A Proxy Server User B F1. INVITE B F2. INVITE B F3. 180 Ringing F4. 180 Ringing F5. CANCEL F6. CANCEL F7. 200 OK F8.

  • Page 949: Successful Call Setup And Call Hold

    The following figure illustrates a successful call setup and call hold. In this scenario, the two end users are User A and User B. User A and User B are located at Yealink SIP IP phones. The call flow scenario is as follows: User A calls User B.
  • Page 950 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones User A places User B on hold. User A Proxy Server User B F1. INVITE B F2. INVITE B F3. 180 Ringing F4. 180 Ringing F5. 200 OK F6. 200 OK F7.
  • Page 951 Appendix Step Action Description The media capability User A is ready  to receive is specified. The port on which User B is prepared  to receive the RTP data is specified. The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the To INVITE—Proxy Server to User B field to User B.

  • Page 952: Successful Call Setup And Call Waiting

    200 OK response. Successful Call Setup and Call Waiting The following figure illustrates a successful call between Yealink SIP IP phones in which two parties are in a call, one of the participants receives and answers an incoming call from a third party.
  • Page 953 Appendix User B accepts the call from User C. Proxy Server User C User A User B F1. INVITE B F2. INVITE B F3. 180 Ringing F4. 180 Ringing F5. 200 OK F6. 200 OK F7. ACK F8. ACK 2-way RTP channel established F9.
  • Page 954 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Step Action Description A unique numeric identifier is  assigned to the call and is inserted in the Call-ID field. The transaction number within a  single call leg is identified in the CSeq field.
  • Page 955 Appendix Step Action Description session. In the INVITE request: The IP address of User A is inserted in  the Request-URI field. User C is identified as the call session  initiator in the From field. A unique numeric identifier is ...

  • Page 956: Call Transfer Without Consultation

    This is called a blind transfer. In this call flow scenario, the end users are User A, User B, and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are connected via an IP network.
  • Page 957 Appendix The call flow scenario is as follows: User A calls User B. User B answers the call. User B transfers the call to User C. User C answers the call. Call is established between User A and User C. User A Proxy Server User B...
  • Page 958 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Step Action Description The IP address of User B is inserted in  the Request-URI field. User A is identified as the call session  initiator in the From field.
  • Page 959 Appendix Step Action Description User B sends a REFER message to the proxy REFER—User B to Proxy Server server. User B performs a blind transfer of User A to User C. The proxy server sends a SIP 202 Accept 202 Accepted—Proxy Server to response to User B.

  • Page 960: Call Transfer With Consultation

    This is called attended transfer. In this call flow scenario, the end users are User A, User B, and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are connected via an IP network.
  • Page 961 Appendix Call is established between User B and User C. User A Proxy Server User B User C F1. INVITE B F2. INVITE B F3. 180 Ringing F4. 180 Ringing F5. 200 OK F6. 200 OK F7. ACK F8. ACK 2-way RTP channel established F9.
  • Page 962 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Step Action Description initiator in the From field. A unique numeric identifier is  assigned to the call and is inserted in the Call-ID field. The transaction number within a ...
  • Page 963 Appendix Step Action Description on hold. The proxy server forwards the mid-call INVITE—Proxy Server to User B INVITE message to User B. User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to the proxy server. The 200 OK response notifies 200 OK—User B to Proxy Server User A that the INVITE was successfully processed.
  • Page 964 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Step Action Description response to User A. The 200 OK response notifies User A that the connection has been made. User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy server.

  • Page 965: Always Call Forward

    User A calls User B. In this call flow scenario, the end users are User A, User B, and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are connected via an IP network. The call flow scenario is as follows: User B enables always call forward, and the destination number is User C.
  • Page 966 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Step Action Description User A is identified as the call session  initiator in the From field. A unique numeric identifier is  assigned to the call and is inserted in the Call-ID field.

  • Page 967: Busy Call Forward

    The call session is now active. Busy Call Forward The following figure illustrates successful call forwarding between Yealink SIP IP phones in which User B has enabled busy call forward. The incoming call is forwarded to User C when User B is busy.
  • Page 968 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Call is established between User A and User C. User A Proxy Server User B User C F1. INVITE B F2. INVITE B F3. 180 Ringing F4. 180 Ringing F5. 302 Move Temporarily F6.
  • Page 969 Appendix Step Action Description The port on which User B is prepared  to receive the RTP data is specified. The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the To INVITE—Proxy Server to User B field to User B. The proxy server sends the INVITE message to User B.

  • Page 970: No Answer Call Forward

    B does not answer the incoming call after a period of time. In this call flow scenario, the end users are User A, User B, and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are connected via an IP network.
  • Page 971 Appendix Call is established between User A and User C. User A Proxy Server User B User C F1. INVITE B F2. INVITE B F3. 180 Ringing F4. 180 Ringing F5. 302 Move Temporarily F6. ACK F7. 302 Move Temporarily F8.
  • Page 972 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Step Action Description The port on which User B is prepared  to receive the RTP data is specified. The proxy server maps the SIP URI in the To INVITE—Proxy Server to User B field to User B.

  • Page 973: Call Conference

    200 OK response. Call Conference The following figure illustrates successful three-way calling between Yealink IP phones in which User A mixes two RTP channels and therefore establishes a conference between User B and User C. In this call flow scenario, the end users are User A, User B, and User C. They are all using Yealink SIP IP phones, which are connected via an IP network.
  • Page 974 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones User A mixes the RTP channels and establishes a conference between User B and User C. User A Proxy Server User B User C F1. INVITE B F2. INVITE B F3.
  • Page 975 Appendix Step Action Description The transaction number within a  single call leg is identified in the CSeq field. The media capability User A is ready  to receive is specified. The port on which User B is prepared  to receive the RTP data is specified.
  • Page 976 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Step Action Description User B sends a SIP 200 OK response to the proxy server. The 200 OK response notifies 200 OK—User B to Proxy Server User A that the INVITE is successfully processed.
  • Page 977 Appendix Step Action Description User A sends a SIP ACK to the proxy server. The ACK confirms that User A has received ACK— User A to Proxy Server the 200 OK response. The call session is now active. The proxy server sends the ACK message to ACK—Proxy Server to User C User C.

  • Page 978: Index

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones Index Numeric Backlight 100 Reliable Retransmission Background Noise Suppression (BNS) 180 Ring Workaround Backing up the local Contacts 802.1X Authentication Blind Transfer Block Out Bluetooth Boot Files About This Guide...
  • Page 979 Connected Line Identification Presentation (COIP) Handset/Headset/Speakerphone Mode Headset Prior Connecting the IP phone Hide Feature Access Codes Contrast Hot Desking Conventions Used in Yealink Documentations Hotline CSTA Control Idle Clock Deploying Phones from the Provisioning Server Incoming Signaling Validation Index...
  • Page 980 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/T5 Series IP Phones MAC-local CFG File MAC-Oriented CFG File Reading the Configuration Parameter Tables Manual Provisioning Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) Ports Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) Recommended References Missed Call Log Reboot in Talking...
  • Page 981 Wi-Fi Table of Contents XML Browser Time and Date Transfer on Conference Hang Up Transfer Mode via Dsskey Transfer via DTMF Yealink IP Phones in a Network Transparency Transport Layer Security (TLS) Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Methods Troubleshooting Solutions TR-069 Device Management...

This manual is also suitable for:

Sip-t19 e2 seriesSip-t19p e2 seriesSip-t4 seriesSip-t5 series

Table of Contents

Save PDF